Quarterlytics / Financial Services / Asset Management - Bonds / Record

Record

rec · LSE Financial Services
Claim this profile
Ticker rec
Exchange LSE
Sector Financial Services
Industry Asset Management - Bonds
Employees 51-200
← All annual reports
FY2021 Annual Report · Record
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
R

e

c

o

r

d

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

2

1

Modernisation and 
 diversification… 
building on our 
 strong core

Record plc
Annual Report 2021

 
 
 
 
 
Our purpose

Our purpose: to deliver innovative, 
thought leading and practical 
solutions to the needs of currency 
market users and investors, 
while maintaining independence 
and integrity.

Strategic report  

Our highlights

Assets Under Management 
Equivalents1 (“AUME”)

$80.1bn

2020: $58.6bn

Earnings per share

2.75p

2020: 3.26p

Revenue

£25.4m

2020: £25.6m

Ordinary dividend per share

2.30p

2020: 2.30p

Profit before tax

£6.2m

2020: £7.7m

Special dividend per share

0.45p

2020: 0.41p

+37%

-15.6%

-0.8%

0%

-20.5%

+9.8%

1.  As a currency manager, Record manages only the impact of foreign exchange and not 
the underlying assets, therefore its “assets under management” are notional rather than 
real. To distinguish this from the AUM of conventional asset managers, Record uses the 
concept of Assets Under Management Equivalents (“AUME”) and by convention this is 
quoted in US dollars. AUME is an alternative performance measure and further detail 
on how it is defined is provided on page 136.

1

1

2

4

6

8

10

12

16

20

24

28

36

39

42

49

51

52

54

62

64

70

86

89

91

100

107

135

135

136

Strategic report
pages 1 to 49

Our highlights 

About us 

Chairman’s statement 

Chief Executive Officer’s statement 

Business model 

Products and distribution 

Products 

Markets 

Strategic priorities and goals  

Key performance indicators 

Sustainability 

Operating review 

Financial review 

Risk management 

Viability statement  

Governance 
pages 50 to 89

Chairman’s introduction 

Board of Directors 

Corporate governance report 

Nomination Committee report 

Audit and Risk Committee report 

Remuneration report 

Directors’ report  

Directors’ responsibilities statement  

Financial statements
pages 90 to 134

Independent auditor’s report 

Financial statements 

Notes to the financial statements 

Additional information
pages 135 and 136

Five year summary 

Information for shareholders 

Definitions 

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information2 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

About us

A client-focused approach. 
A culture of integrity. Strengths 
developed through 38 years 
of experience.

$50.3bn

AUME 
Europe (excluding UK)

63%

Who we are
We are an independent, specialist currency and derivatives 
manager with over 38 years of experience which has allowed 
us to develop a deep and fundamental understanding of the 
risk and reward opportunities within those markets. Record plc 
has a premium listing on the Main Market of the 
London Stock Exchange.

What we do
We listen to our clients and use our years of experience 
and thought leadership in currency and derivatives markets 
to develop solutions tailored to their individual investment 
challenges, including robust and innovative products 
and market-leading service levels.

Our range of products typically assist our clients in 
achieving either their risk-reduction or return-seeking 
objectives, or alternatively our bespoke Multi-product 
mandates have combined risk-reducing and 
return-seeking objectives.

Our clients are largely institutions, including pension funds, 
charities, foundations, endowments, and family offices, 
as well as other fund managers and corporate clients.

Our success will depend upon reinforcing, and further  
building on, the cornerstones to our strategy, which are:

Quality client 
experience

Technology 
and 
innovation

Talent 
development

New York 

Quality client experience

Superior service is core to our client 
proposition and we achieve this on 
various levels by assigning a dedicated 
and experienced relationship manager 
to oversee each client portfolio. 
Direct communication between our 
operational and administrative specialists 
with each client’s own internal functions 
builds on the general level of interaction 
with the client and underpins the overall 
“trusted adviser” relationship.

Strategic report  

3

$19.2bn 

$8.2bn

$2.4bn

AUME 
North America

24%

AUME 
United Kingdom

10%

AUME 
Rest of the world

3%

Talent development

We aim to develop and retain 
a diverse pool of talent which 
is key to delivering our “best 
in class” business model and 
ensuring the long-term stability 
of the business.

Windsor 

Germany

Switzerland

Technology and innovation

Over the last 38 years Record 
has developed a leading position 
in its sector. Our knowledge of 
the currency and derivatives 
market is sustained by our 
research, and results in 
innovative products and 
continued process enhancement 
whilst incorporating advances 
in technology.

Where we operate
The Group’s main geographical 
markets, as determined by the location 
of clients to whom services are 
provided, are the UK, North America 
and Continental Europe, in particular 
Switzerland. The Group also has clients 
elsewhere, including Australia.

The Group’s Head Office is in Windsor, 
UK from where the majority of its 
operations are performed and 
controlled. The Group also has offices 
in New York, Zürich and Düsseldorf.

In addition to these main markets, 
we continue to explore new 
geographical markets which 
we believe may offer 
attractive opportunities.

Key

   Head Office (Windsor)

   Sales office

   Client locations

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information4 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Chairman’s statement

 In a challenging year, 
our focus has been first 
on resilience, and then on 
creating the environment 
for change.

In my statement last 
year, I stated that 2020 
would be noted as the 
Coronavirus year, 
and little did I expect 
to be writing this year’s 
statement whilst still 
emerging from the 
restrictions imposed 
under the UK’s third 
lockdown. 

Neil Record
Chairman

In combination with the final outcome of 
the Brexit negotiations, this year has indeed 
been one of challenge and uncertainty 
where a firm’s ability to adapt has been 
fundamental to its continued success, 
or in extremis its very existence.

Our business has responded well to the 
challenges – our operational resilience 
and commitment to both our clients and 
our people remains uppermost, and our 
strong and liquid balance sheet continues 
to support the transition under the new 
business strategy in terms of renewed 
focus on growth, modernisation 
and succession.

The two imperatives set out by the 
Board last year were to orientate the 
firm for growth, through a programme 
focused on both modernisation and 
diversification, and to establish a plan for 
succession in the most senior executive 
posts at Record. Significant progress 
has been made in both with focus on the 
development of new products including 
Record’s EM Sustainable Finance Fund, 
and also with changes seen at senior 
management and Board level, further 
details of which are set out below and in 
Leslie Hill’s CEO report on page 6.

Financial overview
Growth in management fees of 8% 
(+£1.7 million) offset the reduction in 
performance fees of £1.7 million versus 
FY-20, and consequently revenues 
remained broadly in line with last year 
at £25.4 million (2020: £25.6 million). 

Increased costs linked to the restructuring 
of the business and investment both in our 
people and technology led to a 20% 
decrease in operating profit, broadly 
in line with expectations, to £6.1 million 
(2020: £7.6 million), and a reduction 
in earnings per share to 2.75 pence 
(2020: 3.26 pence).

Further information on AUME flows and 
financial results can be found in the 
Operating review and Financial review 
sections on pages 36 and 39 respectively.

Group strategy
Beyond ensuring Record’s ability to survive 
enforced transition to home working, 
the first complete year under Leslie Hill’s 
leadership has been focused on delivering 
modernisation, diversification and growth.

Modernisation is primarily related to the 
firm’s IT capabilities. It has become clear 
to the Board that Record’s IT infrastructure 
is in need of upgrading and investment; 
that the well-established client-server 
business IT structure is giving way to 
significant advances in technology. 
This transition also opens the door to new 
applications to streamline workflow and the 
management of the large amount of data 
that a modern firm like Record utilises. 
To this end, approximately £0.4 million has 
already been invested, with further 
investment into new projects of 
approximately £0.8 million anticipated in 
the current financial year (FY-22), including 
a mix of both operational and capital 
expenditure.

Strategic report  

5

The Board has also decided to 
begin to diversify by widening Record’s 
investment offerings beyond the existing 
suite of currency-related products and 
services. Several initiatives in this category 
are now underway, and we will be reporting 
them to investors when (and if) each 
reaches implementation stage.

The Board is pleased with the progress 
made in the year from the change in 
strategy, as evidenced by the increases 
in AUME and client numbers, the change 
in revenue mix towards higher-margin 
products, and the development of new 
products including the Record EM 
Sustainable Finance Fund. 

As previously announced on 4 June, 
Jane Tufnell will be stepping down from 
the Board for personal reasons at the 
Company AGM on 27 July. On behalf of 
the Board, I would like to thank Jane for 
her invaluable contribution and dedication 
since joining Record’s Board back in 2015, 
and wish her well for the future. 

Record’s last decade was one of 
consolidation following the extraordinary 
period of the Global Financial Crisis. 
The Board has now decided to change 
the focus from consolidation to growth, 
and has asked management to put growth 
at the top of the priority list. As mentioned 
above, it is highly likely that some new lines 
of business will not include currency 
management as their primary focus.

Further detail on our strategy and goals 
and our progress made against initiatives 
can be found under “Strategic priorities 
and goals” on pages 20 to 23.

Capital and dividend
Our capital policy aims to ensure retained 
capital broadly equivalent to one year’s 
worth of future estimated overheads 
(excluding variable remuneration), in addition 
to capital assessed as required for regulatory 
purposes, for working capital purposes and 
for investing in new opportunities for the 
business.

Our dividend policy targets a level of 
dividend which is at least covered by 
earnings and which allows for sustainable 
dividend growth in line with the trend in 
profitability. It is also the Board’s intention, 
subject to financial performance and market 
conditions at the time, to return excess 
earnings over ordinary dividends for the 
financial year and adjusted for changes in 
capital requirements, to shareholders, 
normally in the form of special dividends.

The Board is recommending a 
final ordinary dividend of 1.15 pence 
per share (2020: 1.15 pence), with 
the full-year ordinary dividend at 
2.30 pence, which is equivalent to the 
full-year ordinary dividend in respect of the 
prior year (2020: 2.30 pence). The interim 
dividend of 1.15 pence per share was 
paid on 31 December 2020, and the final 
ordinary dividend of 1.15 pence per share 
will be paid on 10 August 2021 to 
shareholders on the register at 2 July 2021, 
subject to shareholders’ approval.

Notwithstanding the more positive outlook 
arising from the end of the third lockdown in 
the UK, the Board remains conscious of the 
potential longer-term effects from the 
pandemic and the uncertainty that remains 
in this respect. Consequently the need 
remains for a measured and prudent 
approach to ensuring the business retains 
sufficient capital and liquidity to withstand 
any negative impacts arising, whilst also 
allowing the business to continue to invest in 
implementing its new strategy.

Against this backdrop, the Group has 
reviewed its capital requirements taking 
account of the current market conditions 
and its anticipated costs and regulatory 
capital requirements, set against the solid 
platform for revenue growth delivered from 
the increase in AUME and the expected 
product launch in the current financial year. 
Consequently, the Board considers the 
current level of capital to be sufficient and is 
announcing a special dividend of 0.45 pence 
per share to be paid simultaneously with the 
final ordinary dividend. Total dividends for 
the year are 2.75 pence per share (2020: 
2.71 pence) compared to earnings per share 
of 2.75 pence per share (2020: 3.26 pence).

The Board will continue to consider ordinary 
dividends and other distributions to 
shareholders on a “total distribution” basis. 
The total distribution for any year will be at 
least covered by earnings, and will always 
be subject to the financial performance of 
the business, the market conditions at the 
time and to any further capital assessed as 
required under the policy described above.

The Board
Bob Noyen stepped down from the 
Board of Record plc in February 2021 
and subsequently relinquished his role 
as Chief Investment Officer, effective 
31 March 2021. Bob agreed to assist with 
the transition and maintenance of client 
relationships by providing continued 
support over the next financial year. 
Bob’s knowledge, market experience 
and energy have been invaluable over 
almost 22 years at Record, and on behalf 
of my colleagues I would like to thank him 
and wish him well for the future.

Outlook
The covid-19 pandemic; the associated 
switch to home working; and the 
implications arising from the huge fiscal 
support provided by many governments 
has meant that the already difficult job of 
forecasting the outlook has become even 
more difficult. At the macro-level, the scale 
of developed-country debt, the now 
long-standing near-zero interest rates, 
and the imperative to get economies back 
on their feet means that both fiscal and 
monetary policies are pointing strongly in the 
same, expansionary, direction. While goods 
and services inflation has been quiescent for 
a decade or more, asset-price inflation, 
especially in certain sectors, has been 
rampant. Adding this background to a 
renewed period of digitisation of core 
service provision, and the rapidly rising 
appetite for the elimination of fossil fuels 
in industrialised economies, and there 
appears to be a potent brew for change.

At a more geographic level, with Brexit 
now complete, Record has established a 
physical presence within the EU to minimise 
any cross-border regulatory barriers.

In summary, the Board has set a course 
that is designed to take advantage of the 
opportunities that appear in this newly 
uncertain era, while cognisant that 
unpredictable change brings unanticipated 
risks. I am confident that with our new 
management in place we can deliver 
on such opportunities.

Neil Record
Chairman

16 June 2021

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information6 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Chief Executive Officer’s 
statement

 Our AUME growth and 
its diversification into our 
higher-margin products 
gives us a solid platform 
for revenue growth 
into FY-22.

Leslie Hill
Chief Executive Officer

We have had a very 
busy year since our last 
Annual Report to you all, 
and lots of things have 
gone rather well. 

I see the challenges we face as similar to 
those one would face when modernising 
and improving a house whilst still living in it, 
and also constantly receiving those much 
valued paying guests who are our clients. 
During the year we’ve made good progress 
and we are, with care and careful planning, 
seeing some real results which we can 
share with you all.

Progress against strategy
Our deep desire to diversify our business, 
both by showing new ideas to existing 
clients, and also by engaging with entirely 
new clients, is still at the heart of what we 
are doing. The longevity of our client 
relationships is a source of real pride to us 
all and will continue; I often feel we are not 
so good at getting clients (but getting 
better as we offer more and better 
products) but we are really good at keeping 
them once we have them. Now if we can 
combine that with exciting new projects 
then I am confident we can move forward 
over the next decade without 
losing momentum.

What has gone well? I would like to show 
you this by highlighting some of our key 
staff and their contribution, as we are, 
above all, a team effort.

Diversification
The move into some higher-margin 
products, which I think should continue, 
is critical to our long-term success. 
Our EM Sustainable Finance Fund, which 
we anticipate launching imminently, while 
tricky to develop and set up, with a lot of 
complex needs and requirements to 
ensure it is robust and scaleable, is one 
such example. We think this move into 
both Impact and Sustainable investing is 
one that our clients want and so will last, 
and we plan to stay in the forefront of this 
movement and keep investing, to ensure 
we are always relevant. The Head of our 
Swiss office Dr Jan Witte is to be 
commended for his diligence, patience and 
tenacity to get this project up and running. 
He is a powerhouse, and a real pleasure 
to work with.

Assets Under Management 
Equivalents (“AUME”)

$80.1bn

2020: $58.6bn

+37%

Strategic report  

7

Modernisation
Our modernisation plans, the work on our 
tech stack, our processes and our in-house 
capabilities is quite a long and complex 
project. We are fortunate that the software 
we need is now available at attractive 
prices and we are finding that the growth 
agenda at Record has increased our ability 
to attract more talent into the team, from all 
over the globe – perhaps one of the very 
few silver linings to come out of the 
pandemic. Our Director of IT and Strategic 
Initiatives, Rebecca Venis, has shown us 
how a really clever agile mind, coupled with 
a perennial curiosity and an understanding 
of the world of digital finance, together with 
an apparently inexhaustible source of 
energy, can be put to work with great 
results. Her contribution has been and 
continues to be awe-inspiring.

Succession
Our staff are our greatest asset and they 
have worked hard over the last year, putting 
their own wishes and desires to one side 
to, in the words of Spike Lee “do the right 
thing” in every way. If we did not have such 
a great HR team in Kevin Ayles and 
Liz Goddard we would be lost; they have 
worked so hard at pastoral care throughout 
a challenging period, whilst helping me 
implement necessary changes to allow 
for succession planning. They are both 
great assets to Record – skilled, kind 
and practical.

I am proud to say all of these staff are now 
meaningful equity owners and we plan to 
continue to roll out the share ownership 
and options programme going forward, 
so that everyone who is a big part of our 
future can feel engaged, empowered 
and sufficiently aligned.

After over 21 years at Record our CIO Bob 
Noyen handed over to Dr Dmitri Tikhonov. 
While we are glad to see Bob take a 
well-earned reduction in hands-on 
responsibility it is great to see Dmitri, 
who has himself been at Record for over 
18 years, step up and take the reins. 
His calm and thoughtful approach to 
solving our investment issues and 
challenges is very welcome and his team 
is delighted to have the chance to step up 
themselves and take more responsibility.

Asset flows and financial performance
Solid progress has been made in growing 
our AUME, which closed the year at 
$80.1 billion, its highest ever level and 
up 37% over last year. Total net inflows for 
the year of $9.7 billion spread across our 
hedging products and also our 
Multi-product strategy were further 
bolstered by positive movements both 
in markets and FX of $8.4 billion and 
$3.4 billion respectively. This AUME growth 
and its diversification into our higher-margin 
products, in addition to the expected new 
fund launch, gives us a solid platform for 
revenue growth into FY-22.

Detailed analysis of AUME is provided on 
pages 36 to 38.

Whilst revenues of £25.4 million remained 
broadly flat on last year, our increased 
costs associated with the implementation 
of our strategy have resulted in a decrease 
to our short-term profitability broadly in line 
with expectations, reducing our operating 
margin to 24% (2020: 30%) and our 
profit before tax by 19% to £6.2 million 
(2020: £7.7 million).

The Financial review on pages 39 to 41 
gives additional commentary.

Outlook
I am personally quite pleased with 
the progress made during a difficult 
and challenging first year at the helm. 
Notwithstanding the short-term decrease 
in our profits for FY-21, we go into FY-22 
with our highest ever AUME, the 
anticipated launch of our new EM 
Sustainable Finance Fund in collaboration 
with the largest Wealth Manager in 
Switzerland, and with the benefits of our 
modernisation starting to bear fruit.

First and foremost, we remain committed 
to our clients and to our talented team of 
employees who themselves have shown 
great commitment and adaptability through 
a period of external challenge and 
internal change.

We also remain committed to our new 
strategy, which I believe has already started 
to deliver the growth, modernisation and 
diversification that the business needs and 
I look forward to building on this further into 
FY-22 alongside the talented team we are 
lucky enough to have here at Record.

Leslie Hill
Chief Executive Officer

16 June 2021

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information8 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Business model

Our business model depends on 
our relationships and our people.

Relationships and resources

Our clients

Our experience

Our people

•  We are client-led – client 

relationships are the keystone 
of our success. Only by building 
strong, long-term “trusted adviser” 
relationships with our clients can 
we fully understand their current 
requirements and future 
investment objectives, which 
enables us to develop effective 
solutions for their needs.

•  We are a specialist currency 
and derivatives manager 
with over 38 years’ experience 
– we have a fundamental 
understanding of how currency 
markets operate, which we 
have used to develop a leading 
position in managing currency and 
derivatives for institutional clients.

•  We view our ability to attract, 
retain and motivate highly 
talented staff as key to 
organisational stability 
and long-term success. 

•  Our recruitment process is 

carefully structured to ensure 
that talented people with the right 
skills and experience are recruited 
into the Group. 

Technology and infrastructure
Investing in new technology is essential for ensuring our business remains competitive in terms of our client 
servicing, our product innovation and productivity, and for maintaining profitability. 

   see page 22

Our operational infrastructure is built around how we service our clients and ensures a collaborative approach 
across all sections of the business. Refer to “Technology and innovation” on page 22 for further information.

Our financial resources
The business maintains a robust balance sheet and strong capital position. Positive cash generation allows 
us to reinvest for growth in the business and to drive shareholder value and returns.

   see page 101

Our core stakeholder groups:
•  Clients

•  Our people

•  Shareholders 

•  Society

•  External suppliers

•  Regulators

   see pages 34 

and 35

Strategic report  

9

What we do

How we generate cash

Our investment process
We seek to identify and understand persistent patterns that exist 
within currency markets that are rooted in macroeconomic cycles, 
global risk management activity, as well as structural and 
behavioural features of investment activity. By understanding 
these patterns, whether they be market inefficiencies or risk 
premia, we can develop both risk mitigation and 
value-adding strategies.

We develop robust systematic processes, with macro 
and market-informed portfolio positioning and intelligent 
risk management oversight, which offer the best chance 
to achieve client objectives once implemented within 
our rigorous operational environment.

We continually test the underlying assumptions that support 
our investment beliefs and practices. This constant cycle of 
challenging and reviewing our investment philosophies drives 
product enhancement and new product development alongside 
the requirements of, and in collaboration with, our clients.

Our independence and transparency
We act as an independent agent for each of our clients. 
Being independent from any banks or brokerage firms, we remain 
unconflicted and fully able to act in our clients’ best interests and 
to fulfil our fiduciary obligations. Everything we do is for our clients. 
We are fully transparent in terms of our costs – our only source of 
revenue is from client fees and we make no money from spreads.

Our operational risk management
We assume full operational risk on behalf of our clients 
– our infrastructure, systems and processes are designed 
to mitigate and minimise the operational risk associated with 
managing clients’ currency and derivatives mandates.

Our distribution
•  Our products are delivered both through segregated mandates 
and pooled fund structures to suit individual client requirements.

•  We distribute both through direct sales to institutional clients, 

and through local and global investment consultants.

•  We build long-term relationships with investment 
consultants and help develop their understanding 
of our products and services.

More detailed information on our products and distribution 
is provided on pages 10 to 14. 

What we deliver

Our products   see page 10

Premium client service   see page 21

Rewarding careers   see page 23

Thought leadership   see page 22

Shareholder value   see pages 24 and 25

Revenue generation
Our revenue comes from management fees and performance fees. 
Management fees are charged based upon levels of Assets Under 
Management Equivalents (“AUME”). Fee rates vary between 
products and clients depending on factors such as product 
type, mandate size and the level of tailoring to individual client 
requirements. Performance fees are typically charged as a 
percentage of investment performance above a benchmark 
or a previous higher valuation “high water mark”. 

Expenditure
Record is a service company and our biggest asset is our people. 
The majority of the Group’s costs comprise personnel costs, 
representing remuneration for individuals across all areas 
of the business including the client-facing teams and the 
teams responsible for managing the Group’s operations 
and infrastructure. The Group also has non-personnel costs 
representing, for example, the overheads incurred in running and 
maintaining the offices day-to-day, and payments to suppliers.

Investment
Cash can be used for investment purposes such as the seeding 
of new funds or investment into new infrastructure and technology.

Delivering value
By building strong relationships with our clients and providing high 
levels of client service and tailored solutions, we generate value for 
our clients, employees, shareholders and our other stakeholders.

Cash generative business model
Our business model is net cash generative, allowing us to remain 
independent, self-financing with no external debt, and to return 
surplus cash to our shareholders in the form of dividends.

Further details of cash generation can be found on page 103. 

Net operating cash inflow: 

£6.3 million 

(FY-20: £6.5 million)

Closing share price: 

70.0p 

(FY-20: 26.3p)

Total dividends per share: 

2.75p 

(FY-20: 2.71p)

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information10 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Products and distribution

We aim to forge long-term partnerships with clients, acting 
as their trusted adviser to fully understand their investment 
objectives in order to develop effective solutions.

Another example marries Record’s in-house experience 
with third party expertise, specifically in the area of supply 
chain finance. In this case the core of the offering comes from 
an Asian asset manager with unrivalled access to receivables 
from the supply chains of leading Western corporates. 
In combination with Record’s skill in designing solutions to 
meet clients’ needs, as well as our investor network and client 
service, we have an attractive offering to yield hungry investors, 
whatever their base currency.

While we envisage that both of the strategies outlined will be 
significant contributors to Record’s sales in the years to come, 
we see this client-led, building block approach as being a 
foundation of Record’s future success. As we develop our 
collaborations and partnerships with institutional investors and 
other managers, we see an expansion of our toolkit as being 
a primary driver of growth in the business, increasing the value 
we can add and our appeal to clients old and new.

Clients as partners
Paramount to developing desirable, valuable flagship products 
is the input of, and engagement with, prospective clients so that 
they truly meets their needs and are a solution to challenges 
they face. Record has long prided itself on client retention and 
exceptional levels of client service and this forms the base for 
the creation of any new product or service.

Where possible, we aim to forge long-term partnerships with 
clients, acting as their trusted advisers. Working in this way with 
clients, where both sides understand the other’s capabilities and 
desires, allows us to design solutions that directly address the 
real investment challenges faced by them.

Strategic approach
Record’s strategic sales objective is to drive accelerated revenue 
growth diversified by product, geography and client type. It aims 
to achieve this objective with a sharp focus on the following four 
items: a broad range of flagship products; strategic partnerships 
with our clients and the highest levels of client service; strong 
relationships with third parties including investment consultants; 
and a targeted approach to the sales process leveraging 
technology. As discussed elsewhere in this report, the 
technological investment that the business is making is critical 
for the distribution effort. On the one hand, this is expected to 
underpin the sales and relationship management process. 
On the other hand, it will enable us to deliver innovation within 
our existing service suite as well as integrating new strategies 
to continue to meet and exceed our clients’ needs.

Flagship products
Record has been a specialist currency manager for almost 40 
years and continues to put tailored currency solutions, both risk 
management and return-seeking, at the core of our offering. 
This has led to two key mandate successes with US clients this 
year where our pedigree in systematic investment processes 
and experience managing large accounts has contributed 
significantly to those wins.

However, we recognise that demand for such services is not 
consistent from all investor types or at all times. Over the course 
of FY-21, we have made significant progress in developing our 
offering, listening carefully to the needs and desires of our 
existing and prospective clients. These developments aim 
to align the best of what Record can offer both in terms of 
underlying product design and tailored implementation and 
client service, with the challenges that we find our clients facing.

One such development is the Record EM Sustainable 
Finance Fund in partnership with a large Swiss Wealth Manager, 
more information on which is given in the case study on 
page 15. The challenge identified was to find ethical debt 
investments in Emerging Markets, which can potentially have 
a positive impact in those countries and in their development. 
Record has long-standing experience in Emerging Markets 
as well as strong counterparty relationships and pioneering 
expertise in ESG within the currency arena which have 
enabled the design of a strategy to address the challenge 
faced by that client. 

Strategic report  

11

Working with third parties
Investment consultants have long formed 
a key part of Record’s client engagement 
and sales strategy and have contributed 
significantly to our success. That remains 
as true as ever and we see a focus on 
investment consultants playing a pivotal 
role in our future growth. As the range of 
services that we offer expands with both 
flagship products and tailored solutions, 
so does the scope for our engagement 
with investment consultants and we aim 
to draw on these partnerships and the 
“best-in-class” idea generation from both 
sides to expand our client reach.

Additionally, we intend to work closely with 
a few carefully selected partners in order to 
broaden our reach in certain target markets 
and geographies and to accelerate product 
development. We recognise that alongside 
desirable products, trust is the key 
ingredient in driving growth and putting 
the right idea in front of the right person is 
critical. Partnering with firms that are able 
to leverage the right expertise helps us 
to expand our reach and allows us to 
present our solutions to the right investors 
in the right way.

In the UK, there has been a renewed 
focus on working with fellow asset 
managers where we can add significant 
value through both investment and 
operational currency expertise as they 
seek to broaden their investments and 
client base geographically. We have also 
seen significant interest from insurance 
prospects looking for supply chain finance 
and yield that sits comfortably under 
solvency legislation.

European demand continues to be 
characterised by two key themes: passive 
currency risk management and the ever 
present search for yield. The latter has seen 
us lay some very exciting groundwork for 
a suite of bespoke yielding products, 
in collaboration with trusted partners. 
Early market sounding has given indications 
that these will prove popular with a new 
European client base, struggling for 
attractive investments in a world of 
negative yields.

Finally, we have seen an uptick in demand 
from Asia, historically a smaller market for 
Record, including an appetite for active risk 
management, as well as yield enhancements, 
from rapidly internationalising institutional 
investors in Asia.

A targeted approach
Like every other investment manager, 
the pandemic has seen Record’s Client 
Team grounded and glued to video calls. 
While this has proven a challenge at times, 
the embrace of technology across our 
clients, prospects and partners has opened 
up opportunities. With geographic borders 
and physical distance less of a hindrance 
than ever before, the team will be using 
technology to expand its capabilities in 
reaching a wider audience than was 
previously possible. However, a wider 
audience does bring the risk of a 
diluted message and focus on real tangible 
synergies between our capabilities and the 
needs of our prospective clients is more 
critical than ever.

Tailored geographic needs
Record has long appreciated the different 
demand for services and products in 
the various regions in which we operate, 
focusing accordingly. Indeed these different 
perspectives have been key to Record’s 
success since a challenge on one side of 
a currency pair can be an opportunity for 
the other side.

These geographic differences continue to 
be reflected in the demand we are seeing 
for flagship products. The US continues 
to demonstrate interest in Dynamic 
Hedging, both for risk management and 
return-seeking purposes, with the former 
fuelled in significant part by the continued 
uncertainty in the path of the US dollar. 
Canadian interest also centres on Dynamic 
Hedging strategies but driven more by 
a desire to reduce and optimise the 
currency risk embedded in increasingly 
international exposures.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information12 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Products

The Group’s suite of core products is split 
into two main categories: Currency Risk 
Management and Return-Seeking products. 

Currency Risk Management
Record’s primary risk management 
products are the hedging products and are 
predominantly systematic in nature. Record 
has the experience and expertise to deliver 
tailored hedging programmes to suit the 
individual currency needs of our clients.

We continually enhance our product 
offerings so that they maintain their 
premium product status. In a competitive 
marketplace, our ability to differentiate our 
hedging products is key to maintaining 
and growing our market share further.

Enhanced Passive Hedging
The enhanced Passive Hedging product 
offers the same benefits and requires the 
same level of execution and operational 
expertise as the core product, but 
recognises the opportunities presented 
for adding value by taking advantage of 
structural inefficiencies and behavioural 
changes arising in FX markets. It requires 
continuous monitoring, investment 
judgement and specialised infrastructure 
to identify the opportunities and then to 
take advantage of them with a structured 
and risk-managed approach.

Passive Hedging
Passive Hedging mandates have the 
cost-effective reduction of currency risk 
as their sole objective. This is achieved 
through symmetrical and unbiased 
elimination of currency exposure 
from clients’ international portfolios.

Core Passive Hedging
The core Passive Hedging product requires 
execution and operational expertise to a 
greater extent than investment judgement, 
and provides the following benefits 
to clients:

• 

Independent, best execution

•  Custom benchmarks

•  Optimised exposure capture

•  Netting benefits

•  Regulatory reporting

•  Management of cash flows

Dynamic Hedging
Record’s Dynamic Hedging product is an 
attractive alternative to Passive Hedging 
and has reduction of currency volatility as 
well as generating value as dual objectives. 
The Dynamic Hedging product seeks to 
allow our clients to benefit from foreign 
currency strength while protecting them 
from foreign currency weakness relative 
to their own base currency.

Value is generated entirely through 
the asymmetric reduction of pre-existing 
currency risk and Dynamic Hedging’s 
ability to outperform Passive Hedging is 
dependent on trending in currency markets.

Signal Hedging
Record has a licensing agreement 
with WisdomTree, the New 
York-headquartered exchange-traded fund 
and exchange-traded product sponsor and 
asset manager, under which it provides 
signals that are used to dynamically hedge 
currency exposures within WisdomTree’s 
rules-based index family, and which 
includes the hedging of emerging 
market currencies.

Since Record is not managing the 
exchange-traded funds included under 
such licences, assets under management 
in these funds do not contribute to 
Record’s AUME. Record reports revenues 
arising from these licensing agreements 
under “Other currency services income”.

Audit and fiduciary execution
Record offers transparent and 
cost-effective fiduciary execution for 
clients wishing to undertake foreign 
exchange transactions (spot and forward) 
which are unrelated to their currency 
hedging or investment mandates. All trades 
are executed by Record (as agent) in the 
client’s name, and in accordance with best 
execution practices. Clients benefit from 
both the wholesale pricing Record is able 
to achieve for their trades, as well as from 
the knowledge that their transactions are 
undertaken on a best execution basis.

For clients whose FX transactions are 
undertaken by a third party (e.g. FX 
custodian), Record offers currency 
audits using comprehensive price data 
(both internal and externally sourced). 
Our reports are able to shed light on the 
quality of execution and highlight to our 
clients where there may be scope 
for improvement.

Emerging Market Momentum Hedging
Whilst Emerging Market (“EM”) currency 
exposure is generally expected to 
deliver positive returns through time, 
EM currencies are more volatile than their 
developed market counterparts and 
are sensitive to many of the same 
macroeconomic factors which drive local 
equity and bond markets. This can add 
further pressure to portfolio performance 
during challenging market environments.

Record’s EM Momentum Hedging is 
intended to help investors principally 
concerned with drawdown protection by 
improving the downside risks of holding 
EM currency exposures. Through an early 
warning indicator, EM currency exposure is 
temporarily phased-out from the portfolio, 
helping to protect investors during rapid 
market sell-off phases.

Strategic report  

13

Emerging Market (“EM”) currency
EM currencies offer investors an 
opportunity either to seek a return from 
such currencies or to seek to separate 
the currency effect from the underlying 
overseas domestic asset performance 
(typically equities or bonds). Record 
believes that as a result of convergence 
in the levels of economic output between 
emerging and developed markets, holding 
EM currencies offers the benefit of real 
exchange rate appreciation as well as 
offering higher positive real yields. 
This currency appreciation has been 
a significant contributor of returns to 
(developed market) holders of EM 
assets including equities and bonds.

Momentum
This strategy exploits the periodic tendency 
of the spot exchange rate to appreciate 
after a prior appreciation, and to depreciate 
after a previous depreciation. This market 
inefficiency has persisted across different 
currencies and is present in other asset 
classes, such as equities. Currency is 
commonly thought of as “trending” and 
the Momentum strategy seeks to make 
a return from this phenomenon.

Value
Research suggests that purchasing power 
parity (“PPP”) valuation models have been 
good predictors of the long-term direction 
of spot movements. Currency Value 
strategies exploit this insight, buying 
currencies that are undervalued relative 
to PPP and selling currencies that 
appear overvalued.

Range Trading
The Range Trading strategy exploits the 
tendency for certain currency pairs to trade 
within narrow ranges.

The philosophy comes from the 
observation that spot rate volatility 
is excessive when measured daily, 
but dissipates over a one-to-three 
month period. This stems from the fact 
that demand and supply of FX over certain 
time frames is random and disjointed, 
resulting in the spot rate reacting to 
maintain equilibrium in short-term supply 
and demand. Much of the flow in the 
FX markets is a by-product of economic 
activity (importing or exporting of goods 
or services, cross-border M&A transactions) 
or a consequence of quasi-systematic 
processes (such as passive rolling of 
FX hedges). In view of the above, 
many participants in the FX markets will 
continue to transact despite adverse price 
movements, informing our view that this is 
a reliable risk premium.

Return-Seeking
Record’s Return-Seeking strategies have 
the generation of investment return as their 
principal objective.

Currency Multi-Strategy
The Currency Multi-Strategy range 
includes five principal strategies, being 
Carry, Emerging Market, Momentum, 
Value and Range Trading, and it is possible 
to offer these in either a segregated or 
pooled fund structure.

These strategies can be combined 
in different weightings that appeal to 
particular market segments under Record’s 
Multi-Strategy approach, which can be 
applied as an “overlay” to help clients 
achieve a variety of investment objectives, 
and offers clients access to the main 
sustainable sources of return in the 
currency market. Clients receive a 
diversified return stream which performs 
well under a variety of market conditions 
and reduces the correlation of their 
currency programme to other asset 
classes. Further detail on each of the 
five principal strands is given below:

Carry
The Forward Rate Bias is the observation 
that higher-yielding currencies tend to 
outperform lower yielding currencies over 
longer time periods, and is regarded by 
Record as a fundamental and structural 
currency risk premium. The Carry strategy 
aims to exploit this observation and 
generate returns by buying selected 
developed market higher interest rate 
currencies and selling selected lower 
interest rate currencies.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information14 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Products continued

We also offer bespoke solutions 
tailored to individual client requirements.

Return-Seeking continued
ESG in currency
Research has shown that the institutional 
framework of a country plays an important 
role in its economic growth, with better 
institutions leading to higher growth and 
also lower volatility, paving the way for 
a more sustainable path for the country. 
Our approach to ESG first reviews a wide 
currency universe from an institutional, 
social, and political perspective with the 
objective of determining which currencies 
to accept in our strategy. We then identify 
pro-ESG factors towards which we can tilt 
exposures, increasing the sustainability of 
the overall portfolio whilst maintaining its 
return-seeking characteristics. Factors 
are reviewed both quantitatively and 
qualitatively and are applied to tilt the 
portfolio and to inform our discretionary 
risk management. They are drawn from a 
number of the United Nations Development 
Programme’s (“UNDP’s”) Sustainable 
Development Goals (“SDGs”) which 
we believe serve as advanced indicators 
for higher productivity growth; so by 
systematically incorporating ESG in 
alignment with the UNDP’s SDGs, 
we expect to produce positive 
risk-adjusted returns.

Record EM Sustainable Finance Fund
The fund was developed with the aim 
of investing currency with impact by 
combining strategic investment in 
currencies, an underlay of impact bonds 
and focused counterparty engagement. 

A description of the academically 
supported theory behind the strategy, 
as well as more detail on how these three 
factors are combined to provide sustainable 
investment in less developed economies, 
is provided on page 30 in the Sustainability 
section of this report.

Multi-product
Multi-product mandates typically have 
combined risk-reducing and return-seeking 
objectives, and are bespoke in nature. 
These may include a hedging mandate 
overlaid with selected elements of the 
Currency for Return product, which cannot 
readily be separated into its hedging and 
return-seeking components for 
reporting purposes.

Cash and other
Record also provides ancillary services 
including cash and liquidity management, 
collateral management and 
derivatives overlays.

Information on product investment 
performance is given in the Operating 
review section (pages 36 to 38).

Strategic report  

15

Case study:

New product development:  
Record EM Sustainable Finance Fund

Currency  
for Return

The challenge

The solution

The outcome

Our new product, the Record 
EM Sustainable Finance Fund, an 
Irish-based UCITS ICAV developed in 
collaboration with a large Swiss Wealth 
Manager, is expected to launch shortly.

For more information on the strategy, 
see page 30.

To design a strategy that leverages 
currency investment to support 
development in accordance with the 
UN Sustainable Development Goals. 
This is a unique proposition in an asset 
class largely unexplored within the 
realms of sustainable finance. 
Emerging economies typically rely on 
loans denominated in a foreign currency 
to meet their development objectives. 
Currency volatility, however, can act as 
a barrier to the development of domestic 
capital markets and the creation of 
economic wealth. The costs of insuring 
the currency risk can be high and 
subject to large fluctuations, leaving 
local communities unprotected and 
vulnerable. This exchange rate 
uncertainty creates significant problems 
in deciding if and when to take a loan 
and in assessing the feasibility of paying 
it back in the long term. The challenge 
included how best to explore the 
balance between return-seeking 
currency investment and sustainable 
outcomes to deliver a strategy that 
combines long-term sustainable 
development with currency return.

   Find out more about  

Currency for Return on pages 13 and 37

Currency is an essential instrument 
that can contribute to sustainable 
development in less developed 
economies and create a lasting 
positive impact for local businesses 
and communities. The innovative 
solution blends investments in impact 
bonds as an underlay strategy with a 
diversified emerging market currency 
overlay that captures currency 
undervaluation and capital incentive 
factors to maximise impact. The strategy 
pursues sustainability by taking positions 
in a currency which is underinvested 
across at least one of the following four 
dimensions: time, maturity, liquidity 
and volatility. We deploy capital in aid 
of delivering currency stabilisation in 
emerging economies, contributing to the 
development of the domestic financial 
market structure thereby promoting 
sustainable, inclusive growth. 
The strategy is complemented 
by an accompanying counterparty 
engagement strategy that makes 
execution consistent with the intentions 
of the fund, by encouraging positive 
environmental, social and governance 
developments among counterparties 
in our bank panel.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information16 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Markets 

Our market environment and industry trends

Our market
The currency market represents the biggest 
and most liquid financial market available, 
with exceptionally low transaction costs 
and daily FX volumes averaging $6.6 trillion 
(source: BIS Triennial Central Bank Survey 
of Foreign Exchange and OTC Derivatives 
Markets 2019). The FX market is essential 
to global trade and finance and includes 
a high proportion of not-for-profit or forced 
participants, resulting in profit-seeking 
financial institutions continuing to represent 
a minority of FX market participants. 
Consequently, the market displays 
persistent patterns of behaviour or 
inefficiencies which we believe can 
best be exploited by a combination of 
systematic and discretionary processes.

The FX market continues to 
offer opportunities for investors. 
Record’s expertise is in identifying and 
understanding these opportunities and 
then working with clients to understand 
how such opportunities may be used to 
their best advantage, taking account of 
each client’s individual circumstances 
and attitude to risk.

Global and macro trends
Inflation and ultra-low or negative 
interest rates
The global pandemic cemented an era 
of accommodative policy, epitomised by 
ultra-low rates, multi-trillion dollar fiscal 
packages, and major central bank asset 
purchase programmes. Despite widespread 
disruption to global activity and trade, 
policy activism and the suppression of 
the time value of money helped to contain 
financial market volatility. It is the concern 
of many that these well-intentioned actions 
have inflated most traditional asset returns 
and valuations, with the implication 
that a repeat of such performance is not 
organically possible without new policy 
impulse. The best performing assets could 
now be the riskiest, and as the pandemic 
fades, investors must contend with 
economic realities. Of utmost concern 
is the prospect of rising inflation rates 
as economies reopen, posing the threat 
of disruption through forced central 
bank tightening. 

What this means for our business
Record’s Currency for Return strategies 
are designed to target persistent market 
patterns and risk premia. As economic, 
political, and societal norms change, so 
must our approach. As such, we constantly 
challenge the assumptions underlying our 
investment process. In particular, 
the centrally managed nature of financial 
markets and homogeneity of central bank 
policy contributed to uniformity among 
currencies and lower currency volatility. 
We continued to adjust our investment 
processes accordingly, for example by 
improving the way we capture currency 
value cycles, and extract growth premia 
from Emerging Markets. More broadly, 
the risks to traditional premia are seen 
as validating the need for legitimate and 
diversifying sources of return 
through currency.

Extraordinary Federal Reserve policy 
saw the US dollar take a round trip 
from currency strength to weakness, 
emphasising the benefits of active hedging 
strategies; we have since seen enhanced 
interest in Dynamic Hedging and in October 
on-boarded a new institutional Dynamic 
Hedging client. The prolonged anticipated 
effects of the pandemic in Emerging 
Markets are leading some investors to 
reassess the benefits of holding certain 
EM currencies. This has generated new 
interest in the bespoke management of 
EM currency exposures, for which we 
have the tools, processes and know-how. 
From a strategic hedging perspective, we 
are working with clients to help understand 
the risks and scenarios emanating from 
uncertainty around inflation and 
central bank normalisation.

Additionally, the bottoming out of yields 
across the globe has most investors 
searching high and low for yield, which 
creates a double opportunity for Record. 
Firstly in our well-established business 
working with alternative asset managers, 
particularly in private credit, since they are 
seeing ever-increasing demand as the 
yielding opportunities from the public 
markets have evaporated. This is driving 
both more interest in their strategies from 
foreign investors and a push to source 
assets in other jurisdictions, both of which 
introduce currency management into the 
equation. Secondly and in counterpoint to 
the first, there is significantly more demand 
for yielding, liquid strategies. Record has 
collaborated with a trade finance specialist, 
to be able to offer our clients access 
to solutions centred on diversified, 
short-dated exposure to investment grade 
corporates. Initial engagement with clients 
and prospects alike has been very strong 
and we will work hard to develop this 
opportunity further into FY-22.

Strategic report  

17

Industry trends
Increase in demand for 
sustainable investment products
The last twelve months has seen an 
acceleration in the widespread 
incorporation of sustainability-linked 
factors in investment products as 
investors become ever more focused on 
resilience. With broad understanding that 
“non-financial” data (climate, social, 
governance, etc.) can more completely 
fortify portfolios to weather global shocks, 
asset managers have had to review the 
remits of fiduciary duty to take account 
of these fast-evolving investor preferences 
and broader understanding of material risk. 
Pandemic contagion flagged risks that 
occur concomitant with an increasingly 
interconnected world, reliant upon global 
supply chains and geared by closely 
intertwined national economies. Long-term 
climate risks and the global consequences 
of seemingly idiosyncratic sovereign-level 
physical risks are therefore now better 
comprehended in their magnitude, and the 
importance of international co-operation 
more seriously acknowledged. Investors 
have translated macroeconomic risks into 
portfolio risks, using frameworks such as 
that of the Sustainability Accounting 
Standards Board (“SASB”) to understand 
what this means for the resilience of their 
investments, and it is on asset managers 
to respond with credible and prudent 
sustainable solutions.

What this means for our business
Sustainability has been placed at the heart 
of our business, both at an operations level 
and ever-increasingly at the investment 
level. In partnership with our clients, 
we have designed and crafted original 
sustainable solutions, as illustrated by 
the recent development of the Record 
EM Sustainable Finance Fund; displaying 
thought leadership in an asset class 
often forgone in sustainable investment 
strategies. We look to continue 
collaborating with our clients and other 
research bodies to reach bespoke 
sustainable solutions in the currency 
space, and continue in leading the way 
in our sector. 

In keeping with our beliefs in responsible 
investment, and meeting demand for 
sustainable reporting within standardised 
and trusted reporting frameworks, this year 
we have reported according to the 
recommendations of the Task Force for 
Climate-related Financial Disclosures 
(“TCFD”), completed our UN PRI annual 
report, as well as released a Sustainability 
Report detailing extensively how we 
incorporate sustainability in every corner 
of our business. Whilst the standardised 
formats of the external reports are not 
always a fit for FX investment strategies, 
we continue to aim for transparency and 
disclosure wherever possible. 

Advances in technology
Over recent years technological advances 
have changed the way in which 
businesses in our sector need to operate. 
This includes how data is collected and 
analysed for investment purposes, 
having the ability to trade using 
electronic platforms and algorithms, 
enabling improved client reporting 
processes, and introducing efficiencies 
in more manual processes and procedures. 
The speed of change is dramatic and will 
continue to change the way business is 
done in our sector going forward.

What this means for our business
Technology has a critical role to play in our 
business, both to create efficiency to deliver 
reliable low-cost solutions for clients, and to 
drive innovation in creating new products 
and markets. Technologies such as artificial 
intelligence and machine learning, as well 
as improvements in data science and the 
ability to utilise opportunities offered 
through third party systems, can all 
contribute to the aim of improving our 
investment management products and 
services. As a result, the need to continue 
to observe and invest in technology 
and innovation is paramount to protect 
our capability to respond effectively to 
disruption and change in our markets, 
as well as to support our investment 
management processes and systems, 
improve client service and enhance our 
operating efficiency and effectiveness.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information18 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Markets continued

Market review

Review of the year ended 
31 March 2021
The financial year began just a week 
after the S&P500 bottomed out, 
following the shuttering of economies 
globally and a pause on all 
non-essential activity in order to 
stop the spread of the covid-19 
virus. The first quarter of the year was 
characterised by a relative stabilisation 
in financial market conditions as the 
unprecedented sudden stop in activity 
ushered in large-scale stimulus 
programmes from major central banks 
and governments alike. By our 
estimates, the G4 central banks alone 
grew their balance sheets by over 
$6 trillion during the financial year, 
while debt to GDP in those same 
countries is estimated to have risen 
by 18% over the course of 2020. 

In spite of the damage evident in the 
real economy, these economy-saving 
measures were enough to prevent a 
broader credit crunch and what 
many feared could have amounted 
to a depression. To the contrary, 
risk markets generally rose for the rest 
of the year, with the S&P500 reaching 
new highs as soon as August. 
The rapid recovery of risk sentiment 
would not have been possible without 
the development of life-saving vaccines. 
With reopening prospects tied to the 
attainment of herd immunity, market 
fluctuations followed closely the various 
hurdles – including the discovery of 
new and more contagious virus strains 
– and advancements of the vaccine 
development and deployment 
process. By mid-financial year, market 
participants could be more confident of 
economic reopening in the year ahead.

Faced with the ongoing uncertainty 
of the pandemic and a notable 
inflation undershoot relative to its target, 
in August the Federal Reserve unveiled 
its Average Inflation Targeting 
framework. This new flexible approach, 
all else equal, would see the Federal 
Reserve committing to looser policy 
in order to make up for years of inflation 
undershooting the bank’s target. 
As markets looked through transitory 
inflation weakness to higher expected 
levels in the future, falling ex ante US 
real yields weighed heavily on the 
US dollar, especially versus cyclically 
sensitive currencies like the Australian 
dollar. This also supported a reflation in 
Emerging Market assets through to the 
end of the calendar year.

Aside from navigating the impact of 
the pandemic, investors also had to 
contend with the US elections between 
November and January. In contrast to 
expectations of a mixed result, 
Democratic Presidential candidate 
Joe Biden took the Presidency, 
while his party maintained control 
over the House, and gained narrow 
control over the Senate via the state 
of Georgia. Crucially, this laid the 
groundwork for major fiscal 
stimulus and, by the turn of the year, 
expectations of robust vaccine rollouts 
and a fiscally fuelled normalisation of 
the output gap began to pressure US 
fixed income. In turn, this allowed the 
US dollar to recover some of its losses.

Meanwhile, the UK and EU managed 
to bridge the Brexit hurdle in the nick 
of time after months of intense 
negotiations over competition rules 
and other stickier agenda items, with 
an EU/UK Trade and Cooperation 
Agreement coming into law on the last 
day of the calendar year. With the risk 
of “No deal” and a subsequent hard 
fallout of the EU in the rear-view mirror, 
the pound has traded on stronger 
footing, taking impetus from political 
stabilisation, successful vaccine rollouts 
and a more hawkish Bank of England 
into 2021 – though divorce acrimony 
between the UK and EU still remains in 
periphery and long-term structural 
post-Brexit effects have yet 
to materialise. 

Developed market risk assets remained 
resilient through the end of the financial 
year, however Emerging Markets ran 
into some headwinds. Lacking the 
economic degrees of freedom to hike 
interest rates decisively in response 
to higher US yields, the lagged rollout 
of vaccines, new covid-19 waves, 
and instances of idiosyncratic risks 
generated volatility in some currencies. 
For Russia, sanction risks resurfaced 
under a more hawkish Biden 
administration, while hard-earned 
credibility at the Turkish central bank 
unwound over a weekend following 
the surprise dismissal of its 
market-friendly governor.

Strategic report  

19

Towards the end of the financial 
year, and notwithstanding unforeseen 
developments in virus variants, the end 
of the pandemic started to come into 
sight as countries (particularly in the 
developed world) upped the ante with 
mass inoculations. With that, so did 
questions around the longer-term 
implications of the economic measures 
put in place to combat the downturn. 
Principally, investors were left 
questioning how governments 
might handle the large debts accrued. 
With austere policy being difficult to sell 
politically, official default best avoided, 
and without sustained high growth 
rates, this raised the prospect of 
a prolonged period of financially 
repressive policies.

Relatedly, central banks began to 
carefully consider their exit strategies 
and investors were left wondering how 
or if normalisation might be achieved 
without financial market disruption. 
The covid-19 pandemic proved to be 
one of the largest economic shocks in 
modern economic history, yet with the 
well-intentioned actions of central 
banks and governments, currency 
volatility was contained over the 
period. Therefore, the prospect of 
policy tightening forced by a sudden 
resurgence in inflation as economies 
reopen remains a key risk in the minds 
of investors going into the 2022 
financial year. 

Please refer to the Risk management 
section on page 44 to see how the 
Group has managed the impact of 
the covid-19 pandemic.

US dollar trade-weighted spot exchange rate
Index, December 2019 = 100

110

105

100

95

90

Dec
2019

Jan
2020

Feb
2020

Mar
2020

Apr
2020

May
2020

Jun
2020

Jul
2020

Aug
2020

Sep
2020

Oct
2020

Nov
2020

Dec
2020

Jan
2021

Feb
2021

Mar
2021

Apr
2021

May
2021

Sources: Record, ICE, Macrobond.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information20 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Strategic priorities and goals 

Delivering innovative, thought-leading 
and practical solutions while maintaining 
independence and integrity.

We are a specialist currency  
and derivatives manager

Strategy and goals
Our strategy of diversification, modernisation and planning for 
succession is underpinned by the cornerstones of our business 
philosophy, which are to give clients the best possible experience, 
to continually invest in our technology and innovation, and to 
develop our people to be the best that they can be. 

Performance measurement
The Group uses key performance indicators (“KPIs”) to measure 
and monitor the performance of the Group. The financial and 
non-financial KPIs are presented on pages 24 to 27. 

1

Quality client 
experience

page 21

We aim to build strong, long-term “trusted adviser” 
relationships with our clients.

This is achieved through providing the highest levels 
of service to our clients through proactive relationships, 
informing clients on currency markets and opportunities, 
seeking to understand their currency and related 
investment issues, and tailoring our products to 
meet their individual requirements.

Measured by: 
Revenue, AUME, client 
numbers and client 
longevity

Risks:
Strategy, people and 
employment, regulatory 
change, operational 
and investment

2

Technology  
and innovation

page 22

3

Talent 
development

page 23

We aim to differentiate Record from our competitors 
by reinforcing our thought leadership through innovation 
and by investing in technology.

This is achieved through devising and implementing 
innovative solutions to meet unique client requirements 
in new products and services and by enhancing existing 
products and strategies. Advances in technology help 
us to ensure a scalable, robust and efficient method 
of delivery for our products and services.

We aim to develop and retain a diverse pool of 
talent which is key both to delivery of a “best in class” 
business model, and to the long-term stability of 
the business.

This is achieved through strong recruitment, career 
development and support systems to identify and 
retain talent aligned with both our culture and plans 
for generational change.

Measured by: 
Operating profit margin, 
EPS, DPS, AUME and 
client numbers

Risks: 
Strategy, concentration, 
margin compression, people 
and employment, regulatory 
change, operational 
and investment

Measured by: 
EPS, AUME, average 
number of employees, 
staff retention and 
employees 
with equity interest

Risks: 
Strategy, people and 
employment and investment

Strategic report  

21

Quality client experience

1
We provide the highest levels of service to our clients through proactive relationships informing 
clients about currency markets and opportunities, seeking to understand their currency and 
related investment issues and tailoring our products to meet their individual requirements.

Initiatives
•  Focus on generational change 
to plan for future stability for 
business and client relationships

•  Develop new products aligned 

with investor demand for 
ESG-related and sustainable 
finance strategies

•  Focus on opportunities 

for existing clients to benefit 
from product enhancements 
and complementary services 
alongside current product range 

Progress
•  New Sustainability Office and 
Committee will reinforce our 
commitment to develop 
responsible investment strategies

•  Retention of the existing client 
base and revenue against the 
pressures that the covid-19 
pandemic exerted

•  Development of two new flagship 
product offerings in collaboration 
with external partners for 
distribution in current financial 
year (FY-22) 

Priorities
•  Significantly diversify product 

offerings, in particular new flagship 
products

•  Leverage strong existing 

client relationships to develop 
new strategies

• 

Invest in technology to enhance 
the service offering to clients and 
the overall client experience

•  Continue to diversify product 
offering with selected third 
party relationships

Distribution

The Group’s sales and marketing activities are organised to 
ensure that resources are deployed where opportunities have been 
identified as giving the most likelihood of future success. The sales 
and marketing team is split between the offices in the UK, US, 
Germany and Switzerland, and a centralised team that provides 
comprehensive technical and administrative support to the sales 
offices operates from the headquarters based in the UK.

We distribute through both direct sales to institutional clients, 
and through local and global investment consultants. Building 
long-term relationships with investment consultants and developing 
their understanding of our products and services is important to 
our continued success and our ability to deliver quality services 
to our clients. By working closely both with clients and investment 
consultants we can identify new business opportunities as the 
currency landscape continues to change and evolve.

Find out more about our products and distribution on pages 10 
to 15.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information22 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Strategic priorities and goals continued

Technology and innovation
2
We continue to occupy a unique position in the market by building on and reinforcing our 
experience and thought leadership through our use of technology and delivering innovative 
solutions to our clients. As the environment and the needs of our clients evolve, we also continue 
to adapt our product offering in addition to how these products are accessed to better suit the 
operational requirements of clients.

Priorities
•  Focus on opportunities for client 
collaboration and client-led 
product development

•  Review opportunities for 

introducing third party systems 
to improve trading functionality, 
operational efficiency and 
investment capability

•  Continued investment in research 
to enhance existing products 
and services

•  Further develop Trade Finance 
opportunity with both new and 
existing clients

Initiatives
•  Diversification of products 

and services through strategic 
partnerships, research, 
and innovation

•  Continue to expand our 
dedication to ESG and 
sustainability through firm culture, 
engagement and product creation

•  Deliver complementary investment 
solutions for our strategies to 
support our global client base

• 

Identify opportunities for 
incorporating new technology 
focused on enhancing clients’ 
experience, improving efficiency 
of processes and to improve 
operational resilience

•  Expand our experience, 

knowledge and track record 
in trading and evaluating 
Frontier currencies

•  To support flexible and remote 
working for all staff to improve 
talent acquisition and retention

Progress
•  Designed and built the Record 
EM Sustainable Finance Fund 
in partnership with a Swiss 
Wealth Manager

•  Established a Senior 

Sustainability Office and 
Sustainability Committee

•  Engaged directly with liquidity 
providers and counterparties 
to our clients using our bespoke 
ESG rankings and evaluation 
methodology

•  Partnered in development of 
a new Trade Finance strategy

•  Adopted a new data capture and 
transformation platform, Xceptor, 
to bring efficiencies and improve 
our client offering

•  Developed and established 

a track record trading Frontier 
currencies as part of an EM 
client mandate

•  Disaster recovery and business 
continuity capability enhanced 
to ensure the firm can support 
flexible working and working 
from home 

Collaborative infrastructure

The Group’s operational infrastructure is built around how 
we service our clients and ensures a collaborative approach 
to promote innovation across all sections of the business, 
as well as alongside our strategic partners. To this end, 
our teams are deliberately organised by function, rather than 
product. As such, all teams are involved (to a greater or lesser 
extent) in the day-to-day management or support of each client 
mandate, which enables us to cross-pollinate advancements 
across mandates. 

We maintain a purpose-built and fully integrated end-to-end 
operational process to allow for scalable and customisable 
implementation of our products. The success of our working 
approach is evidenced by the launch of new products in 
collaboration with partners, new strategies in conjunction with 
clients, and delivering solutions designed specifically around 
our clients and their needs.

Strategic report  

23

Talent development

3
We aim to develop and retain a diverse pool of talent which is key both to delivery 
of a “best in class” business model, and to the long-term stability of the business.

Initiatives
•  To ensure the wellbeing of all 

of our staff working from home 
during the covid-19 
lockdown periods

•  To consider the shape of 

future work patterns to align 
the interests of our employees 
with those of our business

•  Alignment of pension 

contributions across all 
staff grades by April 2022

•  Trialling the accelerator course ran 
by Advancing Women Executives 
(“AWE”), which aims to provide 
relevant training to progress the 
careers of mid-level women and 
under-represented professionals 

Progress
• 

Internal promotions made to 
restructure the sales team and 
for CIO succession 

•  All staff were provided with the 

necessary equipment and support 
to facilitate full remote working 
throughout the pandemic

• 

Investment in technology to 
enhance employees’ working 
practices and efficiencies

•  Continuation of workforce 
development and training 
on areas such as a 
Micro-Aggressions workshop 
to highlight unconscious bias 
and tackling discrimination

•  Pension contributions now fully 
aligned across all staff grades, 
effective April 2021

Priorities
•  To liaise with staff to carefully 
plan for the transition back to 
our offices

•  To review and consider the shape 
of future work patterns to align the 
interests of our employees 
with those of our business

•  Continue to plan for generational 
change and to recognise and 
reward talent through 
internal promotion

•  To continue to invest in 

the development, retention, 
wellbeing and diversity of our 
talented employees

Recruitment

Staff retention, motivation and development

The recruitment process is carefully structured and run 
predominantly in-house to ensure that talented people with the 
right skills and experience are recruited into the Group. As part 
of this, the Group runs a successful internship programme, 
which gives the Group the opportunity to benefit from talented 
individuals who are in the early stages of their career and 
identified as potentially having the necessary skills required to 
add value to the business in the future. The process continues 
with a comprehensive induction programme for all new joiners 
to allow them to adapt to the specialist environment 
within Record.

We invest heavily in our people, offering opportunities 
and support for them to grow their knowledge, skills 
and capabilities. An effective performance review and 
objective-setting process, personal development planning 
including the development of career paths, together with 
our open and inclusive office culture, are all key priorities 
in the development and retention of our staff. In addition, 
the Group’s Share Scheme, Profit Share Scheme, Joint Share 
Ownership Plan and the Share Incentive Plan promote the 
acquisition of equity in the Company by staff, improving 
motivation and retention, as well as aligning employees’ 
interests with those of our clients and shareholders. 
At 31 March 2021, the proportion of employee 
shareholders stood at 68% (2020: 69%).

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information24 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Key performance indicators

Measuring our performance 
against our strategy. 

Financial KPIs

Revenue  
(£m)

Revenue is earned mainly from the 
provision of currency management 
services in the form of management 
fees and performance fees.

Operating profit margin  
(%)

Basic earnings per share 
(“EPS”) (pence per share)

Operating profit margin is an alternative 
performance measure, calculated by 
dividing operating profit by revenue.

The Group aims to create shareholder 
value over the long term, illustrated by 
a consistent growth in EPS.

2021

2020

2019

2018

2017

25.4

2021

24

25.6

2020

25.0

23.8

23.0

2019

2018

2017

2021

2020

2019

2018

30

32

31

34

2017

2.75

3.26

3.27

3.03

2.91

Why this is important
Revenue is a key indicator of client 
experience, growth and a key driver of 
profitability. Growth in AUME resulted in an 
8% increase in management fees, although 
challenging market conditions meant this 
was offset by a corresponding decrease in 
performance fees of £1.7 million.

Link to strategy
1   Quality client experience
2   Technology and innovation

Why this is important
EPS measures the overall effectiveness 
of the business model and drives both our 
dividend policy and the value generated for 
shareholders. Similarly to operating profit, 
EPS has been impacted in the short term 
by the increase in costs arising from the 
implementation of the new strategy. 

Link to strategy
1   Quality client experience
2   Technology and innovation
3   Talent development

Why this is important
Operating profit margin is an indicator 
of the efficiency of the business in turning 
revenue into profit. Whilst revenues were 
broadly maintained for the year, costs 
increased as a result of restructuring 
and investing in technology, which have 
impacted the profitability of the business 
in the short term. Further information can 
be found in the Financial review section on 
page 39.

The Group aims to increase the operating 
profit margin over time through investment 
in resources and technology to maintain its 
premium products and services, whilst 
increasing operating efficiency and 
developing more diversified revenue 
streams in higher-margin products.

Link to strategy
1   Quality client experience
2   Technology and innovation
3   Talent development

Strategic report  

25

The Board and Executive Committee use both financial and 
non-financial key performance indicators (“KPIs”) to monitor 
and measure the performance of the Group against its strategic 
priorities. Some KPIs link to specific strategic areas as noted 
below, whilst others represent higher level key metrics in terms 
of the Group’s business and financial performance.

Dividends per share (“DPS”) (pence per share)

The Group’s policy is that total distributions in any year will be covered by earnings. 
The Group aims to pay a progressive ordinary dividend and return surplus capital to 
shareholders where it is in excess of business requirements, usually in the form of 
special dividends.

Ordinary

Special

2021

2020

2019

2018

2017

2.30

2021

0.45

2.30

2.30

2.30

2.00

2020

0.41

2019

2018

2017

0.69

0.50

0.91

Why this is important
Repeatable dividend payments illustrate the cash generative nature of Record’s business, 
and its strength in converting profits into cash and providing a suitable return to 
shareholders. The ordinary dividend per share is unchanged on last year. The special 
dividend per share has increased by 0.04 pence, resulting in a 1.5% increase in total 
dividends to 2.75 pence per share (2020: 2.71 pence per share). 

Link to strategy
1   Quality client experience
2   Technology and innovation
3   Talent development

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information26 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Key performance indicators continued

Measuring our performance 
against our strategy.

Non-financial KPIs

AUME  
($ billion)

Clients

Client numbers represent the number of 
separate legal entities that have appointed 
Record directly as an investment manager 
or invested in a Record fund at the year 
end, and acts as a broad indicator of 
business growth.

As a currency manager, Record manages 
only the impact of foreign exchange and not 
the underlying assets of its clients, therefore 
its AUM (Assets Under Management) are 
notional. To distinguish this from the AUM of 
conventional asset managers, Record uses 
the concept of Assets Under Management 
Equivalents (“AUME”) and by convention this 
is quoted in US dollars. AUME is an 
alternative performance measure and 
further detail on how it is defined is 
provided on page 136.

Client longevity  
(%)

Client longevity measures how long Record 
has been providing currency management 
services to each client with a mandate 
active as at 31 March 2021.

2021

2020

2019

2018

2017

80.1

2021

89

> 10 years

24%

58.6

57.3

62.2

58.2

2020

2019

2018

2017

72

6-10 years

12%

65

60

59

3-6 years

1-3 years

0-1 year

18%

25%

21%

Why this is important
AUME is a key driver of future revenue 
and an indicator of business growth. 
AUME increased by 37% for the year, 
including net inflows of $9.7 billion 
diversified across product lines.

Link to strategy
1   Quality client experience
2   Technology and innovation
3   Talent development

Why this is important
The sustained growth in client numbers is 
indicative of successful client engagement, 
quality client experience and the building 
of strong “trusted adviser” relationships.

Why this is important
Client longevity is both an indicator 
of recent client growth, and also of the 
Group’s success in sustaining quality client 
relationships through investment cycles.

Link to strategy
1   Quality client experience

Link to strategy
1   Quality client experience

Strategic report  

27

Average number of 
employees 

Staff retention  
(%)

The average number of employees through 
the year includes Non-executive Directors.

Staff retention is the number of employees 
who were employed by Record throughout 
the period as a percentage of the number 
of employees at the beginning of 
the period.

Employees with equity 
interest (%)

The percentage of employees who 
own shares in Record plc at year end.

2021

2020

2019

2018

2017

83

82

2021

2020

85

2019

81

73

2018

2017

90

2021

81

84

2020

2019

93

2018

83

2017

68

69

70

72

68

Why this is important
Average employee numbers is an indicator 
of growth and also of how effectively the 
Group is using technology to make 
processes more efficient.

Link to strategy
2   Technology and innovation
3   Talent development

Why this is important
The Group’s third cornerstone is 
talent development, which includes 
the development and retention of our 
talented employees. Whilst every business 
expects a degree of employee turnover, 
the monitoring of employee retention acts 
as a general indicator for factors affecting 
our employees’ wellbeing, development, 
and issues such as longer-term succession.

Why this is important
The alignment of employee interests with 
those of our shareholders is an important 
factor in ensuring the longer-term success 
of our business and is an important tool 
in managing generational change.

Link to strategy
3   Talent development

Link to strategy
3   Talent development

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information28 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Sustainability

Sustainability encompasses many aspects of 
business operations, including both strategy 
and investment as well as business practice, 
community engagement and our workforce. 

Responsible investment

People and diversity

Environment

   Find out more on pages 29 to 30

   Find out more on pages 31 and 32

   Find out more on page 33

In conducting its business operations, the Group has a responsibility to 
its stakeholders and the environment. Our stakeholders, with whom we 
maintain an ongoing dialogue, are detailed on pages 34 and 35. 

We believe that all stakeholders are 
beneficiaries of environmentally friendly 
business practice and socially responsible 
investment. Record is therefore committed 
to being a company with a culture which 
places sustainability, corporate 
responsibility and community 
engagement firmly at the centre 
of priorities.

Section 172 Companies Act 2006
We set out on pages 34 and 35 our key 
stakeholder groups, their material issues 
and how we engage with them. Each 
stakeholder group requires a tailored 
engagement approach to foster effective 
and mutually beneficial relationships.

By understanding our stakeholders, 
we can factor into Boardroom discussions 
the potential impact of our decisions on 
each stakeholder group and consider their 
needs and concerns, in accordance with 
s172 of the Companies Act 2006.

This in turn ensures we deliver solutions 
our clients want and need, continue to 
work effectively with our colleagues 
and suppliers, comply with regulatory 
requirements, make a positive contribution 
to local communities and achieve long-term 
sustainable returns for our investors.

During the year, the Board made 
decisions to deliver against our strategy, 
whilst considering the different interests 
of our stakeholder groups and the impact 
of key decisions upon them. The following 
provides an overview of some of the key 
decisions taken and how integral our 
stakeholders are in the Board’s 
decision-making process:

(a) The establishment of a German 

subsidiary, Record Asset Management 
GmbH, in November 2020. Further 
details are on page 66.

Acting in a fair and responsible manner 
is a core element of our business practice, 
more information on which can be found in 
our separate Sustainability Report. 

(b) Record established a Joint Share 

Ownership Plan (“JSOP”) for the next 
generation of management. Further 
details are on page 74.

(c) The Record Sustainability Office was 
established during the year. Further 
details are on page 29.

Strategic report  

29

Responsible investment

Governance

Sustainability organisational chart

Record plc Board

In 2020, Record cemented its sustainability 
governance structure, creating the role of 
Sustainability Officer to dedicate resources 
into managing and co-ordinating the 
various efforts across the firm to embed 
sustainability. The Sustainability Office 
was thence created, incorporating the 
pre-existing Sustainability Committee 
(formerly named ESG Committee) and 
combining with a Senior Sustainability 
Office which brings together department 
heads on a monthly basis, and is chaired 
by the CEO, to set sustainability firmly on 
the agenda of all departments and 
co-ordinate activity across the business. 
The Sustainability Officer acts as conduit 
between the two committees, representing 
and voicing the views of the Sustainability 
Committee at the senior level.

The Sustainability Committee has 
formalised the key officer roles to delegate 
responsibility in key areas of sustainability, 
namely Corporate Social Responsibility 
(“CSR”), Responsible Investment (“RI”) and 
Climate Change. In this we hope to expand 
the scope of our efforts by utilising more 
time and resources, and engaging more of 
our workforce to have responsibility on 
these key components.

Oversees

Reports to

Senior Sustainability Office (“SSO”)

Chief Executive Officer

Head of Economic Research

Chief Investment Officer

Head of Trading

Head of Human Resources

Sustainability Officer

Head of European Sales

Advises

Reports to

Sustainability Committee

Chair

Sustainability Officer

CSR

Office Sustainability officers

Diversity officers

Sustainable finance

ESG officers

Impact officers

Engagement officers

Climate officers

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information30 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Sustainability continued

Responsible investment continued

Philosophy 

Record Emerging Market 
Sustainable Finance Fund

Record has identified responsible 
investment as an essential prerequisite to 
successful, resilient and prudent investment 
management. Consideration of 
environmental, social, and governance 
(“ESG”) factors within investment strategy 
was a natural extension of its corporate 
philosophy, and continues to infuse its 
strategy development and perception of 
risk factors going forward. As part of our 
drive to incorporate ESG factors into active 
currency products, Record has worked 
in collaboration with Oxford-based 
researchers to extend the boundaries of 
ESG beyond its existing base in equities 
and bonds, to encompass the currency 
markets. This manifested in the creation 
of one of the first ESG Emerging Market 
Currency for Return strategies in 2018, 
and has continued to evolve since into 
a focus on sustainable investment 
with impact.

Collaboration 

Record is actively exploring ways to 
collaborate with external parties, including 
clients who might wish to apply the 
methodology to reflect their own specific 
preferences and views on various elements 
of sustainable finance. Record’s research 
is ongoing, responding to improvements 
in available data, as well as developing 
and improving on its own strategies and 
building and innovating new approaches 
to maintain its place at the forefront of 
research in such a fast-developing space.

During 2020, Record continued to 
pioneer research in this space, developing 
an Emerging Market Sustainable Finance 
product that combines strategic investment 
in currencies, impact bond collateral and 
counterparty engagement to nurture and 
enhance development in the currency 
universe countries. 

Currency
The Record EM Sustainable Finance 
strategy aims to stabilise currencies, 
which in turn can facilitate development 
and harness the growth potential in 
developing countries, in accordance with 
the academically supported theory that 
EM currency stability is a key prerequisite 
for equitable and sustainable economic 
and social development. 

Correctly deployed, currency is an 
essential tool in contributing to sustainable 
development in less developed economies 
and in creating a lasting positive impact. 
This is achieved via two channels: the 
Stabilisation Factor and the Capital 
Incentive Factor. The fund seeks also to 
widen the universe of currencies, 
extending to more illiquid currencies in 
order to broaden the scope of impact. 

Collateral
In 2019 Record began using its own 
capital to invest in Impact Bonds, 
organised through international and 
regional multilateral organisations which 
align with the UN Sustainable Development 
Goals (“SDGs”). Record believed this would 
not only aid development and achieve 
impact, but also presented an opportunity 
to gain experience in dealing, holding and 
reporting on Impact Bonds which 
underscored the collateral component 
of the EM Sustainable Finance Fund. 

The collateral strategy uses cash 
and invests in US dollar-denominated 
sustainable development bonds which are 
primarily issued by highly rated multilateral 
development banks (“MDBs”). The strategy 
can also invest in other impact debt 
instruments such as green, social and 
sustainability bonds issued by sovereigns 
and agencies. The collateral strategy 
is designed for investors who desire 
to make a positive economic, social 
and environmental impact by channelling 
financial resources to sustainable projects 
in low and middle-income economies. 

Counterparty engagement 
Our Counterparty Engagement Strategy 
creates a watertight strategy which aligns 
our execution with the aims of the overall 
strategy. Further, our banks can be 
considered as part of the financial 
supply chain. ESG risks associated 
with counterparties are thereby a 
supply chain risk. 

We thereby evaluate our counterparty bank 
panel using primary, AI and third party ESG 
data to create an aggregated proprietary 
ESG score, which is then used to direct 
flows towards more sustainable banks. 
Crucially, this is paired with regular 
engagement calls and quarterly reports 
to encourage progress on key areas 
such as diversity, fossil fuel financing and 
misconduct, internalising the externalities 
of our banks on wider stakeholders. 

Strategic report  

31

People and diversity

Workplace

Record’s working environment 
is designed to encourage bright, 
dynamic and committed individuals to 
thrive. We believe that investing in our staff 
and developing their potential is key to the 
success of the business and our policies 
and practices reflect this.

The Group’s offices have been designed 
to allow all departments to work together 
in an open plan environment. The open 
plan office allows ease of communication 
between departments, as well as enabling 
staff to work closely with senior 
management. After a successful year 
working remotely, the Group is looking 
forward to welcoming everyone back into 
the office with the introduction of a hybrid 
working pattern to allow everyone to fully 
utilise the positives of both working from 
home and in the office.

The office environment and culture promote 
staff development and training. All staff are 
invited to participate in Company update 
meetings which are led by the Chief 
Executive Officer. The Group also provides 
study support to employees who wish to 
pursue relevant professional qualifications. 
The Board has established a staff-run 
welfare committee which organises 
team-building and other social events, 
enhancing interaction between different 
departments within the business.

In addition, the Group continues to provide 
a number of other benefits to employees 
including pension, private medical cover, 
life insurance, permanent health insurance, 
maternity and shared parental benefits, 
lunchtime fitness classes and subsidised 
gym membership. A new ultra-low emission 
(“ULEV”) car benefit scheme was 
implemented to continue our commitment 
to sustainability through employee benefits. 
All employees participate in the Group 
Profit Share Scheme and have the 
opportunity to acquire shares in Record plc 
through this scheme, as well as through 
the Record plc Share Incentive Plan. 
All employees are also offered the 
Employee Assistance Programme, 
which provides 24/7 confidential telephone 
support from qualified counsellors as well 
as online computerised cognitive 
behavioural therapy, to support anyone 
struggling with their mental health. 
We organised a Company-wide talk 
with Insuring Women’s Futures (“IWF”), 
which highlighted the differences in men’s 
and women’s financial journeys, and how 
our financial lives have changed since 
covid-19. In February 2021 we also held 
a Micro-Aggressions workshop to highlight 
issues such as unconscious bias and 
tackling discrimination.

The Group has an established internship 
programme for students and during the 
year welcomed interns from Oxford 
University, the University of Warwick 
and the University of Bath.

Staff retention (%)

FY-21

FY-20

FY-19

90%

81%

84%

Human rights

Record complies fully with appropriate 
human rights legislation in the countries 
in which it operates.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information32 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Sustainability continued

People and diversity continued

Diversity and inclusion

The Group’s aims include ensuring that all 
staff are provided with equal opportunities 
and that the workplace is free of 
discrimination. It also aims to ensure that 
all recruitment processes are fair and are 
carried out objectively, systematically 
and in line with the requirements of 
employment law.

The Group ensures that all staff are aware 
that it is not acceptable to discriminate, 
harass or victimise anyone, and also that it 
is unlawful and that such behaviour will not 
be tolerated under any circumstance.

The Group believes that valuing what is 
unique about individuals and drawing on 
their different perspectives and experience 
will add value to the way the Group does 
business. By accessing, recruiting and 
developing talent from a diverse pool of 
candidates, the Group can gain an insight 
into different markets and better support 
client needs. 

The Group aims to create a productive 
environment, representative of different 
cultures and groups, where everyone has 
an equal chance to succeed.

Two affinity networks were introduced in 
2020 in order to celebrate, support and 
recognise the diversity of our staff, and also 
set a diverse agenda amid recruitment and 
development efforts. The Ethnic Diversity 
Network (“EDN”) and Gender Equality 
Network (“GEN”) seek to engage all staff 
in discussions and celebrations of diversity, 
hosting training sessions, socials, and topic 
discussions over the year. The networks 
also seek to engage with industry and 
community-wide initiatives, conducting 
key support for charities and initiatives 
such as Destiny Transformers and Insuring 
Women’s Futures. 

The gender diversity within the Group is shown below:

Gender balance 
As at 31 March 2021 

Board Directors 

Senior management 

Other staff 

All employees 

Female 

Male

number 

%  number 

%

3 

5 

25 

33 

50% 

21% 

49% 

41% 

3 

19 

26 

48 

50%

79%

51%

59%

See our separate Sustainability Report for our Gender Pay Gap and further diversity  
data and more information on our diversity initiatives. 

Community

Record recognises its obligations and 
responsibility to contribute to the wider 
community outside of the firm. Over the 
course of the year, the Group made 
charitable donations totalling £19,247. 
Our charitable giving is focused on 
employee choice, with the Group matching 
employee donations and sponsorship. The 
Group continues to encourage employees 
to participate in fundraising activities for 
charitable causes and this year employees 
participated in a variety of events, including 
charity lunches and fundraising 
competitions. Examples of supported 
charities and causes included The Ashford 
and St Peter’s Hospital Charitable Fund, 
Berkshire Women’s Aid, the Great Ormond 
Street Stocking Appeal, Alexander Devine 
Children’s Hospice Service, and Destiny 
Transformers. A scheme allowing UK 
employees to give to charity through 
the payroll is also offered. 

Charitable donations (£’000)

FY-21

19.2

FY-20

15.2

FY-19

16.8

We also provide financial assistance 
to students studying at Balliol College, 
Oxford through a bursary scheme, 
which provides grants to students who 
aim to pursue ambitions which will benefit 
the wider community, for example in 
medical or charitable fields.

 
 
Strategic report  

33

Environment

Energy consumption (kWh 000)1,3

FY-21

82

90

FY-20

163

592

Scope 2

Scope 3

Location-based methodology (Tonnes of CO2e)1,3

FY-21

19

80

FY-20

42

198

Scope 2

Scope 3

Market-based methodology (Tonnes of CO2e)1,3

FY-21

28

80

FY-20

68

198

Scope 2

Scope 3

Energy and GHG emissions annual % change2,3

Reporting category 

Scope 1 

Scope 2 

Scope 3 

Total 

Scope 1, 2 & 3 CO2e  
Intensity ratio:  
tonnes CO2e/FTE 

Energy 
 consumption 
UK & offshore 

Location-based 
methodology 
UK & offshore 

Market-based 
methodology 
UK & offshore

— 

-50% 

-85% 

-77% 

— 

-54% 

-60% 

-59% 

—

-54%

-60%

-58%

-61% 

-61%

1.  Scope 1 emissions were zero for the reported years.
2.  Scope 1 covers combustion of gas & combustion of fuel for transport purposes. Scope 2 covers 

purchased electricity. Scope 3 covers business travel in rental cars and employee-owned vehicles; 
premises waste, water, and T&D losses; business travel; outbound deliveries; commuting; 
and homeworking. The total CO2e intensity ratio is calculated as the total CO2e tonnes divided  
by total firm FTE.

3.  Please note that rounding errors may exist.
4.  Group emissions data relates to the calendar year preceding the given financial year end.

Streamlined Energy and 
Carbon reporting (“SECR”) and 
Greenhouse gas emissions
The Group seeks to minimise its carbon 
footprint through recognising the 
environmental impact of its activities, 
reducing that impact through responsible 
procurement of goods and services, 
and offsetting its remaining carbon 
emissions. The Group first assessed its 
carbon footprint in July 2006, and has 
offset its carbon emissions since then 
through investment in renewable energy 
projects, currently in Kenya.

Methodology
The method used to calculate GHG 
emissions is the GHG Protocol Corporate 
Accounting and Reporting Standard 
(revised edition), together with the latest 
emission factors from recognised public 
sources including, but not limited to, BEIS, 
the US Energy Information Administration, 
the US Environmental Protection Agency 
and the Intergovernmental panel on 
Climate Change.

Energy efficiency actions taken
2021 saw a significant fall in carbon 
emissions4 across the board, down 77% 
in energy consumption and 59% and 
58% in location-based and market-based 
emissions, respectively. This was 
anticipated given the move to  
work-from-home practices for most 
employees over the last year, significantly 
reducing business emissions as a result 
of reduced office use and lower 
commuting times. Our focus will be on 
keeping emissions lower on the return 
back to the office over the next fiscal year, 
with particular focus on office sustainability; 
taking this opportunity to reassess our 
everyday business routines and promote 
a green transition to net zero as set out in 
the separate Sustainability Report.

TCFD 
We are public supporters of the Task Force 
on Climate-related Financial Disclosures 
(“TCFD”), and this year will disclose for 
the first time in the Sustainability Report 
according to the recommendations on 
disclosure of climate risk exposure. 

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
34 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Sustainability continued

Section 172 Companies Act 2006 – Our stakeholders

Clients

Shareholders

People

Clients are the central focus of our business. 
The Group aims to understand clients’ 
evolving needs, to respond to them 
accordingly and deliver long-term 
investment performance.

  How we engage

Our operational infrastructure is built 
around the specific requirements of our 
clients, including systems and controls to 
reduce risk and manage each stage of the 
process as efficiently as possible.

The Client Team builds strong and trusted 
relationships with current and potential clients 
to develop a clear view of client objectives 
and how these will evolve.

Regular review meetings with clients 
ensure client requirements are 
consistently monitored.

Clients receive frequent and regular reports 
on market and investment performance.

  Their material issues

Our clients’ material interests relate to the 
performance of Record’s products after fees, 
a robust risk framework, transparency, 
value for money, maintaining the high levels 
of service they receive and the provisions of 
bespoke and innovative products which 
fulfil their needs.

   2021 highlights and 

future changes

There has been heightened engagement 
with clients during the covid-19 crisis and 
increased monitoring of market conditions 
and performance.

We are currently evaluating options for 
improving our client reporting with the aim of 
providing more real-time data and analytics.

The Record Sustainability Office was set up 
during the year to maintain sustainability and 
ESG factors as a focus across all aspects of 
our business, including investment strategy, 
corporate responsibility and risk 
management for the benefit of 
clients and all of our stakeholders.

We rely on the support and engagement 
of our shareholders to deliver our strategic 
objectives and grow the business. 

  How we engage

The Group Chief Executive Officer and 
Chief Financial Officer presented the full-year 
and half-year results to major investors.

The primary means of communicating with 
shareholders are through the Annual General 
Meeting, the Annual Report and Accounts, 
half-year results and related presentations. 
All of these are available on the Company’s 
website www.recordcm.com. The website 
also contains information on the business 
of the Group, corporate governance, all 
regulatory announcements, key dates in 
the financial calendar and other important 
shareholder information.

  Their material issues

Our shareholders want Record to ensure it 
is a long-term sustainable business which 
delivers attractive returns through share 
price growth and regular dividends.

   2021 highlights and 

future changes

The appointment of Panmure Gordon as 
Record’s corporate broker has improved 
engagement with existing shareholders and 
enhanced the Group’s ability to reach out to 
potential investors.

The Chair of the Nomination Committee has 
contacted certain institutional shareholders 
to discuss the UK Corporate Governance 
Code requirements related to the tenure 
of the Chairman.

The 2020 AGM was held as a closed meeting 
due to covid-19 but the Board was keen to 
maintain engagement and so shareholders 
were invited to ask questions via e-mail, with 
the Board undertaking to either respond via 
return of e-mail or publication on the investor 
relations website.

Our people are central to the ongoing 
success of the business and we aim to 
attract, retain, develop and motivate the right 
people for current and future business needs.

  How we engage

We engage with our employees 
through a variety of channels including a 
Company intranet, management briefings, 
e-mail updates and Company-wide 
presentations by the Group Chief 
Executive Officer .

We seek to encourage employees in 
developing and advancing their careers, 
offering assistance in such forms as study 
support and the possibility of secondments 
to overseas offices.

The Group’s remuneration framework includes 
schemes aimed at aligning employees’ 
interests with those of shareholders by offering 
them the opportunity to share in our success 
through share ownership.

  Their material issues

Our people’s material interests relate to the 
working and cultural environment provided by 
Record. They want to be fairly rewarded for 
their contribution and have opportunities for 
learning, growth and further development 
as well as sharing in business success.

   2021 highlights and 

future changes

Tim Edwards is the designated 
Non-executive Director responsible 
for workforce engagement and reports 
to the Board on employee viewpoints.

A number of workforce engagement sessions 
have taken place over the period with small 
groups meeting with Tim to discuss topics 
including business strategy, communication, 
working arrangements, remuneration and 
career opportunities.

Affinity networks have been introduced 
to embrace diversity and encourage the 
inclusion of all staff. 

During the covid-19 pandemic there has 
been increased engagement with staff to 
ensure their wellbeing during the extended 
periods of home working.

The covid-19 crisis highlighted the benefits 
of flexible working arrangements for both staff 
and the business. We are now reviewing the 
possibility of more flexible working patterns 
and practices upon return to the office in 
order to achieve an appropriate work-life 
balance for the longer-term benefit of both 
our employees and the business.

Strategic report  

35

Society

External suppliers

Regulators

We recognise the responsibility we have 
to the local community, wider society and 
the environment.

  How we engage

We are proud to support the communities in 
which Record operates and we have a long 
history of contributing through monetary 
donations, gift giving and employee time. 
Further details can be found on pages 31 
and 32.

We are keen to promote responsible investing 
and have incorporated environmental, social 
and governance (“ESG”) factors into some of 
our currency management products. Record 
has been a signatory to the Principles for 
Responsible Investment since June 2018.

The Record Sustainability Office was set up 
during the year to maintain sustainability and 
ESG factors as a focus across all aspects of 
our business, including investment strategy, 
corporate responsibility and risk management 
for the benefit of clients and all of our 
stakeholders.

We have established a Sustainability 
Committee which meets on a quarterly 
basis and we have a documented policy 
establishing our approach to sustainability 
matters, details of which can be found from 
page 28.

  Their material issues

Record aims to manage the business in a 
manner which minimises its impact on the 
environment and helps to benefit society.

   2021 highlights and 

future changes

Employees helped to raise £19,247 for local 
and national charities during the year.

Record has now been certified carbon 
neutral for over twelve years.

Further details of our fundraising and 
charitable support projects can be found 
on page 32 and also online in our 
Sustainability Report 2021.

We rely on the use of external suppliers and 
service providers to supplement the Group’s 
own infrastructure, benefiting from the 
expertise these suppliers provide. 

  How we engage

We maintain a close working relationship with 
all our suppliers and service providers, with 
regular review of contracts and arrangements 
in place performed as part of the budgeting 
process.

All material supplier contracts are subject 
to due diligence checks and contracts are 
thoroughly reviewed by Record’s in-house 
legal team before signing. Signed service 
level agreements are in place for all 
critical suppliers.

Record has a supplier payment policy which 
ensures that all invoices are approved and 
duly paid within agreed terms.

  Their material issues

Our suppliers wish to develop mutually 
beneficial working relationships over the 
long term.

   2021 highlights and 

future changes

During the covid-19 crisis we have continued 
to pay all suppliers and service providers on 
a timely basis.

Our drive to implement new technology has 
resulted in new relationships with software 
suppliers and IT contractors, allowing access 
to expert knowledge and skills and resulting 
in flexible, effective and efficient working 
partnerships. There will be further 
engagement with third party suppliers 
as technology developments continue.

As a global business, we seek to have 
transparent and open relationships with our 
regulators around the world. Regulators 
provide oversight to ensure the business 
is operated within regulatory parameters, 
thereby giving valuable assurance to clients 
and other stakeholders.

  How we engage

We have an experienced Head of Compliance 
to manage the compliance function and 
oversee regulatory matters.

We engage directly and through membership 
of various industry bodies with regulators and 
policymakers as appropriate to ensure that 
our business understands and contributes to 
evolving regulatory requirements.

The Audit and Risk Committee receives 
regular reports from the Head of Compliance 
which cover the Group’s regulatory processes 
and procedures and its relationship with 
regulators. The reports also outline the 
material changes in the regulatory 
environment in which the Group operates.

We receive advice and updates on regulatory 
matters from both our internal and external 
auditors and also our lawyers.

  Their material issues

Regulators want to ensure that our business 
is run responsibly with the best interests of 
our clients at the centre of everything we do. 
They seek to protect the integrity of the 
financial systems they supervise and promote 
fair competition for the benefit of clients.

   2021 highlights and 

future changes

As part of its Brexit strategy, the Group has 
established a German subsidiary.

We have complied with the latest version 
of the UK Corporate Governance Code as 
deemed appropriate given the size and nature 
of the business. See pages 54 and 55 for 
further details.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information36 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Operating review 

AUME increased by 37% in US dollar 
terms, finishing the year at $80.1 billion, 
its highest ever level.

Product investment performance
Hedging
Our hedging products are predominantly systematic in nature. The effectiveness of each client mandate is assessed regularly and 
adjustments are made when necessary in order to respond to changing market conditions or to bring the risk profile of the hedging 
mandate in line with the client’s risk tolerance.

Passive Hedging
Record’s enhanced Passive Hedging service aims to reduce the cost of hedging by introducing flexibility into the implementation of 
currency hedges without changing the hedge ratio. While the strategy is partly systematic, the episodic nature of many opportunities 
exploited by the strategy means it requires a higher level of discretionary oversight than has historically been associated with Passive 
Hedging. High levels of central bank intervention have meant there have been particularly high levels of liquidity in the FX derivatives 
market since April 2020. This has, for the most part, had a dampening effect on volatility and reduced the opportunity set available for 
clients. In December 2020, however, we saw significant volatility arise in the FX forwards market for a period of a couple of weeks. 
We positioned client portfolios appropriately to extract value from this volatility. Positive performance for the year can be attributed to 
actively managing clients’ duration profiles in such a way that they benefited from these market opportunities as and when they arose.

The table below shows the total value added relative to a fixed-tenor benchmark for an enhanced Passive Hedging programme for a 
representative account. The base currency used is Swiss francs.

Return for 
year to 
31 March 2021 

Return 
since 
inception1

Value added by enhanced Passive Hedging programme relative to a fixed-tenor benchmark 

0.05% 

0.08% p.a.

Dynamic Hedging 
The performance of our Dynamic Hedging product depends on how the foreign currencies change in value relative to the base currency 
of our client. During the year, US investors saw gains from currency on international assets when valuing positions in US dollars, as the 
US dollar depreciated against the majority of G10 currencies. Record’s Dynamic Hedging product adjusted hedge ratios in line with US 
dollar fluctuations, reducing hedging losses when the US dollar was weaker and helping to protect against currency losses when the US 
dollar was episodically stronger – as a result, on the net basis, this allowed our clients to participate in currency gains on the underlying 
foreign currency exposure. 

The performance of the Dynamic Hedging programmes hedging US dollar exposures into other currencies was opposing and reflective 
of the mandates’ specific objectives, benchmarks and inception dates in the reported period.

Value added by Dynamic Hedging programme 

Return for 
year to 
31 March 2021 

Return 
 since 
inception2

(0.49%)  0.45% p.a.

1.  Since inception in October 2014.
2.  Since inception in April 2009.

 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic report  

37

Currency for Return 
Currency Multi-Strategy
Record’s principal Currency for Return product during the year was Currency Multi-Strategy. This combines a number of diversified 
return streams, which include:

•  Forward Rate Bias (“FRB”, also known as Carry) and Emerging Market strategies which are founded on market risk premia 

and as such perform more strongly in “risk on” environments; and

•  Momentum, Value and Range Trading strategies which are more behavioural in nature, and as a result are less risk-sensitive.

Record’s Multi-Strategy mandates delivered positive overall performance over the year which was driven by the outperformance in 
FRB and EM strategies given their positive correlation to sentiment. Positive vaccine news supported the global growth outlook and 
the mitigation of negative tail risk scenarios around a prolonged recession, which enticed inflows into EM and risk-on DM currencies.

Return for  

Returns 

Record Multi-Strategy composite1  

12 months to   Return since  Volatility since 
inception 
% p.a.

31 March 2021 
% 

inception 
% p.a. 

2.86% 

0.86% 

3.19%

Scaling
The Currency for Return product group allows clients to select the level of exposure they desire in their currency programmes 
by selecting the required level of scaling and/or the volatility target.

It should be emphasised that in this case “scaling” refers to the multiple of the aggregate notional value of forward contracts in 
the currency programme to the mandate size. This is limited by the willingness of counterparty banks to take exposure to the client. 
The AUME of those mandates where scaling or a volatility target is selected is represented in Record’s AUME at the scaled value of 
the mandate, as opposed to the mandate size. 

AUME development
AUME expressed in US dollar terms finished the year at $80.1 billion, an increase of 37% (2020: $58.6 billion). When expressed in 
sterling, AUME increased by 23% to £58.1 billion (2020: £47.3 billion).

AUME development bridge – year to 31 March 2021 ($bn)

90

80

70

60

50

40

58.6

AUME at
1 April
2020

8.4

3.4

9.7

80.1

Net flows

Markets

FX effects
and scaling
adjustments

AUME 
at 31 March
2021

AUME movements
Passive Hedging AUME increased by 22% to $61.5 billion at the end of the year (2020: $50.3 billion), including net inflows of $1.5 billion 
and $0.6 billion from new and existing clients respectively. Further positive impacts arose from market movements ($6.4 billion) and 
movements in exchange rates ($2.7 billion).

Dynamic Hedging AUME increased by 271%, ending the year at $9.3 billion (2020: $2.5 billion). The majority of the $6.8 billion increase 
is attributable to net inflows ($6.6 billion), of which $5.5 billion was from new clients with the remaining $1.1 billion from existing clients. 
Exchange rate movements added a further $0.2 billion.

Currency for Return AUME increased to $3.9 billion at the end of the year (2020: $2.6 billion) as a result of positive movements in 
exchange rates ($0.3 billion), scaling ($0.2 billion) and market movements ($0.8 billion).

Multi-product AUME increased to $5.2 billion (2020: $3.0 billion) as the result of $1.0 billion of net inflows, market movements of 
$0.9 billion and exchange rate movements of $0.3 billion.

1.  Record Multi-Strategy composite is since inception in July 2012, showing excess returns data gross of fees in USD base, and scaled to a 4% target volatility.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
38 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Operating review continued 

AUME development continued
Market performance
Record’s AUME is affected by movements in market levels because substantially all the Passive and Dynamic Hedging, and some of the 
Multi-product mandates, are linked to equity, fixed income and other market levels. Market movements increased AUME by $8.4 billion 
in the year ended 31 March 2021 (2020: decrease of $3.2 billion).

Further detail on the composition of assets underlying our Hedging and Multi-product mandates is provided below to help illustrate more 
clearly the impact of equity and fixed income market movements on these mandate sizes.

AUME composition by underlying asset class as at 31 March 2021

Passive Hedging 

Dynamic Hedging 

Multi-product 

Equity 
% 

30% 

97% 

0% 

Fixed 
income 
% 

37% 

0% 

0% 

Other 
%

33%

3%

100%

Forex
Approximately 80% of the Group’s AUME is non-US dollar denominated. Therefore, foreign exchange movements may have an 
impact on AUME when expressing non-US dollar denominated AUME in US dollars. Foreign exchange movements increased 
AUME by $3.1 billion over the year. This movement does not have an equivalent impact on the sterling value of fee income.

At 31 March 2021, the split of AUME by base currency was 12% in sterling, 47% in Swiss francs, 20% in US dollars, 15% in euros 
and 6% in other currencies.

AUME composition by base currency

Base currency 

Sterling 

US dollar 

Swiss franc 

Euro 

Australian dollar 

Canadian dollar 

Swedish krona 

Product mix
AUME composition by product

Passive Hedging 

Dynamic Hedging  

Currency for Return 

Multi-product 

Cash  

Total  

31 March 2021 

31 March 2020

GBP 6.7bn 

USD 16.2bn 

CHF 35.2bn 

EUR 9.9bn 

AUD 2.1bn 

CAD 4.8bn 

SEK 0.4bn 

GBP 6.3bn

USD 6.2bn

CHF 31.0bn

EUR 8.1bn

AUD 1.6bn

CAD 3.5bn

SEK 3.9bn

31 March 2021 

31 March 2020

US $bn 

61.5 

9.3 

3.9 

5.2 

0.2 

% 

US $bn 

77% 

12% 

5% 

6% 

0% 

50.3 

2.5 

2.6 

3.0 

0.2 

%

86%

4%

4%

5%

1%

80.1 

100% 

58.6 

100%

The mix of hedging AUME changed during the year with net inflows into higher-margin Dynamic Hedging reducing the concentration from 
lower-margin Passive Hedging AUME.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic report  

39

Financial review

The year has been one 
of transition, with focus 
on the implementation of 
the new strategy arising 
from the Group’s change 
of leadership.

Steve Cullen
Chief Financial Officer

Overview
As expected, the financial impact of such 
change has been felt in the form of reduced 
profitability in the short term as the 
business seeks to embed structural and 
resource changes necessary in 
the implementation of the new strategy.

Notwithstanding a challenging year due 
to the impact of covid-19, strong progress 
was made in the second half in terms of 
growth in AUME in existing products as well 
as in the development of new products, the 
full benefits from which we expect to see in 
the current year (FY-22). The Group remains 
independent and profitable, supported by 
its strong and liquid balance sheet. 

Revenues remained broadly flat on last 
year at £25.4 million (2020: £25.6 million) 
supported by an 8% increase in 
management fees offsetting the drop in 
performance fees of £1.7 million for the 
year. Operating profit for the year fell 
to £6.1 million (2020: £7.6 million) and the 
operating profit margin decreased to 24% 
(2020: 30%) with profit before tax falling to 
£6.2 million (2020: £7.7 million). The fall in 
operating profit resulted from an increase 
in operating expenses (excluding variable 
remuneration) of 11% to £15.7 million, 
and variable remuneration fell to 
£3.2 million (2020: £3.5 million). 

Profit and loss (£m)

Revenue 

Cost of sales 

Gross profit 

2021 

2020

25.4 

25.6

(0.4) 

(0.3)

25.0 

25.3

Personnel (excluding GPS) 

(10.3) 

Non-personnel cost 

(5.4) 

Other income or expense 

0.0 

(8.6)

(5.7)

0.1

Total expenditure  
(excluding GPS) 

GPS 

Operating profit 

(15.7) 

(14.2)

(3.2) 

(3.5)

6.1 

7.6

Operating profit margin 

24% 

30%

Net interest received 

Profit before tax 

Tax 

Profit after tax 

0.1 

6.2 

0.1

7.7

(0.8) 

(1.3)

5.4 

6.4

Revenue

£25.4m

2020: £25.6m

-0.6%

Management fees

£24.9m

2020: £23.1m

+7.8%

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
Expenditure
Cost of sales
Cost of sales comprises referral fees and 
costs in relation to the Record Umbrella 
Fund.

Operating expenditure
The Group operating expenditure 
(excluding variable remuneration) increased 
by 11% to £15.7 million for the year (2020: 
£14.2 million).

Growth in personnel costs of 20% to 
£10.3 million (2020: £8.6 million) reflects 
salary increases from internal promotions 
arising from restructuring plus the full-year 
effect of recruiting at more senior levels 
towards the end of the last financial year. 
The Group remains conscious of the 
need for good cost control balanced 
with ensuring the business is appropriately 
resourced to achieve its strategic goals 
of growth and succession.

Non-personnel costs decreased by 
5% during the year to £5.4 million 
(2020: £5.7 million). Whilst the Group 
has continued to invest in technology 
and systems, cost savings have been 
made in client-facing activities such as 
travel and conferences due to the impact 
of covid-19.

Other income was £41k for the year 
(2020: £82k) and represents net gains 
made on derivative financial instruments 
employed by the Group’s seed funds, 
hedging activities and other FX 
adjustments or revaluations.

40 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Financial review continued

Management fees
Passive Hedging management fees 
decreased by 5% to £11.4 million for the 
year (2020: £12.0 million). Whilst average 
AUME increased over the year, the 
consequent increase in fees was more than 
offset by the impact from the decision by 
some clients with enhanced Passive 
Hedging mandates to change from a higher 
management fee basis to a lower 
management plus performance fee basis 
during the year.

Dynamic Hedging management 
fees increased by 41% to £5.6 million 
(2020: £4.0 million) as a result of the 
increase in AUME arising from net inflows 
of $6.6 billion from new and existing clients.

Management fees from Currency for Return 
mandates remained consistent with last 
year at £2.0 million.

Multi-product management fees increased 
by 14% to £5.9 million (2020: £5.1 million) 
linked to the net inflows of $1.0 billion 
in the second half and the impact of 
positive market movements in the year 
of $0.9 billion.

Performance fees
Performance fees are derived from a 
combination of hedging and return-seeking 
products. Aggregate performance fees of 
£0.1 million were earned during the year 
(2020: £1.8 million).

In contrast to February and March 2020 
when most assets were re-priced down as 
a result of the pandemic, the year saw 
reduced volatility linked to unprecedented 
amounts of central bank interventions. 
Consequently, some assets rebounded 
faster while both our Currency for Return 
and enhanced Passive Hedging products 
are taking longer to make up lost ground 
versus previous high water marks, resulting 
in reduced performance fees for the year.

Other currency services income
Other currency services income totalled 
£0.4 million (2020: £0.7 million) and 
consists of fees from ancillary currency 
management services including collateral 
management, signal hedging and tactical 
execution services. Fees charged for these 
ancillary services are not linked to AUME.

Revenue
Record’s revenue derives from the 
provision of currency management 
services, fees for which can be 
charged through management fee only 
or management plus performance fee 
structures, which are available across 
Record’s product range. Management 
fee only mandates are charged based 
upon the AUME of the product, and 
management plus performance fee 
structures include a lower percentage 
fee applied to AUME, and a proportional 
share of the specific product performance 
measured over a defined period.

Management fees are typically charged 
on a quarterly basis, although Record may 
charge fees monthly for some of its larger 
clients. Performance fees can be charged 
on quarterly, six-monthly or annual 
performance periods on the basis 
agreed with the particular client.

Growth in AUME drives growth in 
management fees. Whilst positive market 
movements of $8.4 billion were broadly 
evenly split across both halves of the year, 
the impact from the net inflows of $9.7 billion 
was felt in the second half of the year. 
Consequently, revenues of £11.8 million 
for the first half increased by 14% to 
£13.5 million in the second half (ignoring 
performance fees) with the financial impact 
from the $80.1 billion headline AUME 
expected to be seen more fully in FY-22.

Management fees earned during the 
year increased by 8% to £24.9 million 
(2020: £23.1 million), with the increase in 
management fees of £1.7 million offsetting 
the decrease in performance fees 
(of £1.7 million) for the year.

Revenue analysis (£m)

Year 
ended 
31 Mar 
2021 

Year 
ended 
31 Mar 
2020

Management fees 

Passive Hedging 

11.4 

12.0

Dynamic Hedging 

Currency for Return 

Multi-product 

5.6 

2.0 

5.9 

4.0

2.0

5.1

Total management fees 

24.9 

23.1

Performance fees 

0.1 

1.8

Other currency  
services income 

Total revenue 

0.4 

0.7

25.4 

25.6

 
 
 
 
 
Strategic report  

41

Group Profit Share (“GPS”) Scheme
The Group operates a discretionary GPS 
Scheme i.e. variable remuneration, which 
is linked to both the financial performance 
of the Group and the achievement against 
individual performance objectives for staff. 
Historically a long-term average of 30% 
of underlying operating profit before GPS 
(“GPS pool”) has been made available 
to be awarded to staff. However, for the 
prior year ended 31 March 2020 the 
Remuneration Committee introduced 
changes to the operation of the scheme 
with the aim of rewarding individual 
employee performance that drives revenue 
growth, improvements to efficiency and 
reduced costs. Consequently, the 
expectation is that the average GPS % 
will now diverge from the long-term average 
due to the Remuneration Committee using 
the flexibility and discretion it already holds 
in varying the GPS pool between 25% to 
35% of underlying operating profit 
before GPS.

For the year ended 31 March 2021, 
the GPS pool is 34% of pre-GPS 
underlying operating profit, which 
represents £3.2 million, a decrease 
of 9% over the previous financial year 
(2020: £3.5 million).

Further information on variable 
remuneration can be found in the 
Remuneration report starting on page 70.

Operating profit and margin
Group operating profit decreased by 20% 
to £6.1 million (2020: £7.6 million) and the 
Group operating margin decreased to 24% 
(2020: 30%). Whilst revenue has remained 
constant with last year, as expected the 
implementation of the new strategy has 
resulted in a short-term negative impact 
on the operating margin.

Cash flow
The Group consolidated statement of cash 
flows is shown on page 103 of the 
financial statements.

The Group’s year-end cash and cash 
equivalents stood at £6.8 million (2020: 
£14.3 million) and the total assets managed 
as cash were £19.8 million (2020: 
£22.3 million). The cash generated from 
operating activities before tax is shown on 
page 101 to the financial statements and 
was £7.7 million (2020: £7.9 million). 
During the year, taxation of £1.4 million 
was paid (2020: £1.4 million) and 
£5.3 million was paid in dividends 
(2020: £5.9 million).

At the year end, the Group held 
money market instruments with maturities 
between three and twelve months, worth 
£12.9 million (2020: £8.0 million). These 
instruments are managed as cash by the 
Group but are not classified as cash under 
IFRS rules (see note 18 of the financial 
statements for more details).

Dividends
An interim ordinary dividend of 1.15 pence 
per share (2020 interim: 1.15 pence) was 
paid to shareholders on 31 December 
2020, equivalent to £2.2 million.

As disclosed in the Chairman’s statement 
on page 4, the Board is recommending 
a final ordinary dividend of 1.15 pence per 
share, equivalent to £2.3 million, taking the 
overall ordinary dividend for the financial 
year to 2.30 pence per share. 
Simultaneously, the Board is also paying 
a special dividend of 0.45 pence equivalent 
to £0.8 million, making the total dividend in 
respect of the year ending 31 March 2021 
of £5.3 million equivalent to 100% of total 
earnings.

The total ordinary and special dividends 
paid per share in respect of the prior year 
ended 31 March 2020 were 2.30 pence 
and 0.41 pence respectively, equivalent 
to total dividends of £5.3 million and 
representing 83% of total earnings per 
share of 3.26 pence.

Financial stability and 
capital management
The Group’s balance sheet is strong and 
liquid with total net assets of £26.8 million 
at the end of the year, including current 
assets managed as cash totalling 
£19.8 million. The business remains cash 
generative, with net cash inflows from 
operating activities after tax of £6.3 million 
for the year (see consolidated statement 
of cash flows on page 101 of the financial 
statements).

The Board’s conservative capital policy is 
to retain minimum capital (being equivalent 
to shareholders’ funds) within the business 
broadly equivalent to twelve months’ worth 
of future estimated operating expenses 
(excluding variable remuneration), plus 
capital assessed as sufficient to meet 
regulatory capital requirements and working 
capital purposes, and for investing in new 
opportunities for the business. 

To this end, the Group maintains a financial 
model to assist it in forecasting future 
capital requirements over a three-year 
cycle under various scenarios and monitors 
the capital and liquidity positions of the 
Group on an ongoing and frequent basis. 
The Group has no debt.

Record Currency Management Limited 
(“RCML”) is a BIPRU limited licence firm 
authorised and regulated in the UK by the 
Financial Conduct Authority (“FCA”), and is 
a wholly owned subsidiary of Record plc. 
Both RCML and the Group submit 
semi-annual capital adequacy returns to 
the FCA, and held significant surplus capital 
resources relative to the regulatory financial 
resource requirement throughout the year.

The Board has concluded that the Group 
is adequately capitalised both to continue 
its operations effectively and to meet 
regulatory requirements, due to the size 
and liquidity of balance sheet resources 
maintained by the Group.

The Group held regulatory capital resources 
based on the audited financial statements 
as at 31 March as follows:

Regulatory capital resources (£m)

Core Tier 1 capital  

26.8 

28.0

2021 

2020

Deductions:  
intangible assets 

Regulatory capital  
resources 

(0.4) 

(0.4)

26.4 

27.6

Further information regarding the Group’s 
capital adequacy information can be found 
in the Group’s Pillar 3 disclosure, which is 
available on the Group’s website at  
www.recordcm.com.

Cautionary statement
This Annual Report contains certain 
forward-looking statements with respect to 
the financial condition, results, operations 
and business of Record. These statements 
involve risk and uncertainty because they 
relate to events and depend upon 
circumstances that will occur in the future. 
There are a number of factors that could 
cause actual results or developments to 
differ materially from those expressed or 
implied in this Annual Report. Nothing in 
this Annual Report should be construed 
as a profit forecast.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
42 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Risk management

Record’s culture is one of integrity and 
accountability, and is embedded into the control 
environment across all areas of the business.

The Board has ultimate responsibility 
for risk and the oversight of the risk 
management process within the business. 
Recognising that risk is inherent in all of 
the Group’s business dealings, and in 
the markets and instruments in which the 
Group operates, it places a high priority 
on ensuring an integrated approach and 
a strong risk management culture is 
embedded throughout the Group, 
with accountability at all levels within the 
business. Effective risk management and 
strong internal controls are integral to the 
Group’s business model and are reflected 
in the risk management framework adopted 
within the business.

Risk management framework
Risk appetite
As part of its responsibility for the oversight 
of the risk management process, the Board 
determines the risk appetite of the 
business. This defines the risk tolerances 
within which the business must operate in 
order to achieve its strategic and business 
objectives, and takes into account the 
interests of clients, our people and 
shareholders as well as any capital or any 
other regulatory requirements. The Board’s 
ICAAP (Internal Capital Adequacy 
Assessment Process) considers the risk 
appetite statement and the process used 
for the monitoring of key risks against 
defined thresholds to ensure adverse 
trends or levels of heightened risk are 
identified and appropriately escalated 
for action if required.

The Board reviews and considers the 
principal risks, and its risk appetite and 
tolerances, on a regular and ongoing basis 
in light of strategic plans, and changes in 
the business and regulatory environment. 
The Board currently considers the following 
categories of risk in determining the risk 
appetite of the Group:

Capital adequacy risk
Capital adequacy risk is the risk that the 
Group is unable to support its strategic 
business objectives due to not meeting 
its minimum regulatory capital requirement. 
The Group has a capital and dividend 
policy, which is designed to ensure that 
capital retained is broadly equivalent to one 
year’s worth of estimated future overheads 
(excluding variable remuneration), in 
addition to capital assessed as required for 
regulatory purposes, for working capital 
purposes and for investing in new 
opportunities for the business.

This policy ensures a significant capital 
buffer over regulatory requirements, and 
consequently capital adequacy risk is not 
considered a significant risk in terms of the 
principal risks detailed on pages 45 to 48.

The business is also exposed to both 
conduct risk and reputational risk.

Conduct risk
Conduct risk is defined as the risk of 
causing detriment to a client or damaging 
the integrity of the market because of poor 
systems or processes, or inappropriate 
judgement by staff in execution of the 
Group’s business. 

The conduct of our staff and the strength of 
our internal control systems and processes 
are fundamental to the effective operation 
of the Group’s risk management 
framework. The impact of conduct risk is 
evident and managed primarily within the 
strategic, operational and investment risk 
categories, and when combined equates 
to the overall conduct risk of the Group. 
Consequently, conduct risk is not 
considered as a separate risk category 
within the principal risks section on 
pages 45 to 48.

Reputational risk
Reputational risk is the risk of loss 
or adverse impact arising from an 
unfavourable perception of the Group 
on behalf of clients, counterparties, 
employees, regulators, shareholders 
or other stakeholders. The impact 
from reputational risk can manifest as a 
consequence of an occurrence of any of 
the Group’s principal risks, either in isolation 
or together with other risks, and is therefore 
considered to form an integral part of each 
of the Group’s principal risks. For this 
reason, reputational risk is not considered 
as a separate risk category within the 
principal risks section below.

The remaining principal risk categories are 
listed below and further detail is given on 
pages 45 to 48:

Strategic risk

Business risk

Operational risk

Investment risk

Oversight
Oversight of the risk management 
framework is governed by various 
committees as delegated by the Board.

The Board has delegated authority to 
the Audit and Risk Committee to provide 
oversight and independent challenge 
in relation to internal controls, risk 
management systems and procedures 
and external financial reporting.

The Executive Committee is the delegated 
decision-making body for the day-to-day 
operation of the business and includes 
executive Board members and other 
senior personnel.

Strategic report  

43

Risk management framework – overview

Record Board

Executive Committee

Audit and Risk Committee

Investment Committee

Risk Management Committee

The Board has delegated authority to the 
Investment Committee to approve changes 
to any of the Group’s investment processes 
and to establish and maintain policies 
for these processes. The Investment 
Committee’s members are listed on 
page 61. Investment Committee approval 
is required prior to implementation of any 
new or amended investment process 
or product.

As prescribed in terms of reference 
approved by the Audit and Risk Committee, 
the Risk Management Committee 
continually reviews existing, new and 
emerging risks, and the nature of any 
operational incidents, with the objective of 
ensuring that adequate systems and 
controls are in place to minimise and 
preferably eliminate such incidents and their 
impact on clients and the Group.

Lines of defence
The Record culture is one of integrity 
and accountability; core values that are 
embedded into the control environment 
surrounding all areas of the business.

The overall risk management framework 
is underpinned by three lines of defence 
and is overseen by the Audit and Risk 
Committee, as delegated by the Board.

Within this framework, the first line of 
defence provides management assurance 
and rests with line managers within their 
specific departments and with senior 
managers responsible for the 
implementation and maintenance of 
higher-level controls to aim to ensure 
adherence to quality standards and 
regulatory requirements. Functions such as 
Front Office Risk Management, 
Compliance, Risk, Legal, HR and Finance 
provide the second line of defence through 
the drafting, implementation and monitoring 
of policies and procedures to align with 
best practice, to ensure compliance and to 
provide assurance and oversight for the 
Board and the Audit and Risk Committee.

The third line of defence is performed by 
internal audit, which provides independent 
assurance on the adequacy and 
effectiveness of the Group’s risk 
management, control and governance 
processes, providing recommendations to 
improve the control environment. Internal 
audit is provided by Deloitte LLP (“Deloitte”).

External independent assurance for 
shareholders is gained through the 
statutory annual external audit process run 
by BDO LLP (“BDO”), the Group’s external 
auditor. The Group has commissioned RSM 
Risk Assurance Services LLP (“RSM”), 
an independent third party, to perform the 
annual service auditor’s report in respect 
of Record Currency Management Limited 
under both the International Standard on 
Assurance Engagement (“ISAE”) 3402 
and the American Institute of Certified Public 
Accountants Attestation Standard AT-C 
Section 320 (“AT-C 320”). In performing 
this work, RSM reports its opinion on the 
description of internal controls with respect to 
the investment management and information 
technology activities, the suitability of the 
design of the relevant controls, and the 
operating effectiveness of specific controls 
for the period 1 April to 31 March, in line with 
the Group’s financial year.

The Group considers the strong capital 
buffer retained under the capital and 
dividend policy provides an effective 
additional line of defence in terms of 
mitigation when considering its 
principal risks.

External independent assurance activity

Statutory external audit (BDO)

ISAE 3402 and AT-C 320 service auditor’s  
report on internal controls (RSM)

Embedded culture of integrity and accountability

1st line of defence:

2nd line of defence:

3rd line of defence:

Business operations and support

Control and oversight functions

Internal audit 
(independent assurance – Deloitte)

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information44 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Risk management continued

Covid-19
Whilst the impact of covid-19 continues 
to disrupt the world economy, many 
businesses, including those in financial 
services, have successfully adapted to 
working under the change in environment, 
including full remote working. 
Market liquidity has now returned and 
the temporary market dislocations seen 
during the pandemic have now receded. 
However, at time of writing, the pandemic 
continues to cause severe disruption 
across certain parts of the globe, including 
the identification of new strains of the virus, 
which has limited the progress in the global 
recovery. Therefore, whilst no longer an 
emerging risk, a degree of uncertainty 
persists and the risk continues to be 
assessed under business risk.

Information on how the Group has been 
impacted by the pandemic, including on its 
business and operations, is given in more 
detail below.

Review of the impact of covid-19
Our people
Covid-19 is a public health crisis and first 
and foremost our focus has been on the 
health and wellbeing of our people and their 
families. During the crisis, Record has not 
furloughed any staff nor made any covid-19 
related redundancies, and we have not 
relied on any external support in the form 
of government assistance schemes. 
At time of writing, planning has begun for 
the easing of restrictions and how these 
may impact the return to “normal” working 
conditions in terms of social distancing, 
travel, increased office hygiene 
requirements and other measures. 
As a result of the pandemic, all of our 
employees are fully able to work remotely, 
giving us an opportunity to offer a more 
flexible working pattern thereby improving 
the work-life balance for our employees 
going forward.

Our clients
Record’s clients are institutional and of 
high quality with strong, long-standing and 
trusted relationships built over many years. 
Record has not lost any clients as a result 
of the covid-19 pandemic and, using 
technology-led solutions and digital 
channels, has maintained strong lines 
of communication and service levels 
throughout the crisis, responding to client 
requests in volatile markets and restricted 
liquidity, and underpinning the quality of our 
service offering. The quality of our clients 
is reflected in the business having not 
suffered from any unpaid fees for over 
20 years through various market crises and 
cycles, and we have not seen any change 
in our recovery rates as a result of 
the pandemic.

Our technology and operations
Full business continuity has been 
maintained throughout all stages of the 
crisis. Remote access systems have been 
strengthened and over the course of the 
lockdown additional IT equipment and 
resource has been sourced to facilitate 
both the necessary communication 
channels with clients, and the required 
working environment from home.

Our governance and oversight
Virtual meetings have replaced physical 
meetings in the office and broadly follow 
the same pattern as prior to the crisis, 
although the frequency for some meetings 
was increased in the early stages of the 
pandemic, for example more regular Audit 
and Risk Committee meetings and weekly 
Executive Committee catch-ups to discuss 
employee wellbeing, market behaviour and 
other management issues.

Our risk and management reporting 
framework has continued to function as 
planned, as have monitoring and oversight 
tasks operated by the compliance team.

Our business model
With the exception of those changes 
mentioned above, the impact of covid-19 
on our business model has been fairly 
limited and well contained. Our costs have 
not materially increased as a result of the 
virus and our balance sheet remains well 
capitalised and robust, maintaining our 
independence throughout. In terms of 
revenue, whilst we have not seen and do 
not anticipate any direct material outflows as 
a result of covid-19, the link between some 
of our clients’ mandates with other markets, 
such as equity and fixed income, means our 
AUME is also affected to a lesser extent by 
movements in such markets. Consequently, 
whilst we saw a relatively small impact (-7%) 
on our AUME at the start of the pandemic 
in the final quarter of FY-20, this proved 
relatively short lived. Markets have since 
rebounded and our AUME increased by 
14% (+$8.4 billion) in FY-21 as a result of 
such market movements.

As expected, our short-term profitability 
has been impacted by the investment 
made in implementing our new strategy 
and not as a result of the impact of 
covid-19 on the business, which remains 
profitable and cash generative, with no 
changes to our capital or dividend policy.

Strategic report  

45

Emerging risks
Emerging risks are primarily external in nature and tend to overlay the Group’s existing principal risk categories. Emerging risks can 
include natural disasters, pandemics, disruption in financial markets and business infrastructure, political risk and changes or trends 
in the competitive landscape. The Group Board, management and Risk Management Committee constantly monitor emerging risks by 
including these in the ongoing review of risks performed through the risk management framework, assessing the potential likelihood 
and impact on the principal risks faced by the business.

Emerging risk – trend in sustainable investment
The last year has seen a rapid acceleration of the move towards sustainable investment. Investor sentiment is now more focused than 
ever on the effects of climate change and on how the financial sector can force the change for good through the promotion of responsible 
investment. This trend will only continue and must be acknowledged by embracing the challenge and recognising the opportunities 
available to make a difference.

Record has identified responsible investment as an essential prerequisite to successful, resilient and prudent investment management. 
This year has seen the formalisation of Record’s sustainability framework, incorporating sustainability into our investment philosophy and 
governance structure. Our commitment to delivering responsible investment products for our clients has been illustrated by the 
development of the Record EM Sustainable Finance Fund in collaboration with a large Wealth Manager in Switzerland, more information 
on which is provided in our case study on page 15.

The risk associated with this trend has moved from an emerging risk to a strategic risk, since the impact of not recognising the risk or 
opportunities arising could lead to a failure to deliver the growth strategy, thereby affecting the longevity of the Group.

Principal risks
The following section shows the Board’s assessment of the principal risks faced by the business alongside an explanation of how these 
risks have been managed or mitigated, and how the significance of the risk has changed during the year. These risks fall into a number 
of distinct categories and the means to mitigate them are both diverse and relevant to the nature of the risk concerned.

Strategic risk

The risk of failing to identify and implement the correct strategy would impact expected outcomes, earnings and profitability of the Group. 
This risk is influenced by internal and external factors.

Link to 
strategy

1

2

3

Risk

Failure to deliver strategy 
– risk of failure to achieve 
strategic objectives through 
internal or external factors.

Potential impact – reduced short 
to medium-term profitability, and 
growth prospects and viability 
limited longer term.

Rating

Change

Mitigating activities and update

Low

The Board sets strategy and is responsible for ensuring 
the Group has the right structure, leadership and culture 
to execute.

Regular and ongoing review of strategic options, 
opportunities and threats.

New leadership has made progress in executing change 
in strategy, as illustrated through 37% growth in AUME, 
new product development, implementing new technology, 
and new talent in senior positions.

Key to strategy link
1  Quality client experience 

2  Technology and innovation

3  Talent development 

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information46 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Risk management continued

Business risk

The risk of the business being unable to generate fee income and to control costs in line with business plans. 

This risk is influenced by internal and external factors.

Risk

Link to 
strategy

Rating

Change

Mitigating activities and update

Medium

Low

Medium

Low

1

2

1

2

1

2

3

1

2

Concentration risk – the risk of 
concentration either by product, 
client type or geographical 
location leading to over-reliance 
on any one category of revenue.

Potential impact – Record’s 
products are predominantly 
currency management based. 
A move away from currency by 
its core client base or a high-value 
client, or a change in Swiss 
regulation, could result in material 
outflows and loss of revenue.

Margin compression – the risk 
of a lower fee environment due to 
changes in investor demand or 
competitive pricing pressures, 
and/or rising costs within the 
industry arising from regulatory 
requirements and/or technological 
advances.

Potential impact – reduced fee 
rates and/or increased costs lead 
to decreased margins and lower 
returns for shareholders.

People and employment risk 
– the inability to attract or retain 
key employees or to plan for 
succession could impact the 
Group’s ability to support 
business activities or achieve 
strategic objectives. 

Potential impact – not supporting 
business activities or achieving 
the strategic objectives of 
the Group would lead to a 
material negative impact on 
corporate performance.

Regulatory change – the risk of 
failure by the Group to comply 
with the introduction of new 
regulation or changes to existing 
regulation.

Potential impact – ability to do 
business may be affected, 
resulting in loss of revenue 
or regulatory censure.

Continued diversification of investment capabilities 
across risk-reducing and return-seeking products, 
plus the capability to offer bespoke products to 
meet client requirements.

Commitment to client services excellence and transparent 
investment process is integral to retention.

Building long-term and close trusted adviser relationships 
with clients assists with retention, even in the event of 
regulatory change or market uncertainty and disruption.

Restructure of Client Team to focus on diversification of 
products and geographies. 

Significant and diversified AUME inflows achieved in FY-21. 

Bespoke solutions and added-value to differentiate 
products within the market.

Focus on offering premium service differentiates Record 
from competition and builds long-standing and “trusted 
adviser” relationships.

Continued investment into resources and technology 
to ensure effective and cost-efficient processes.

Notwithstanding the FY-21 reduction in operating margin, 
reduced reliance on revenue from lower-margin products 
(Passive Hedging) with the win of a significant Dynamic 
Hedging client during the year in addition to the anticipated 
launch of the Record EM Sustainable Finance Fund have 
reduced this risk in the current financial year (FY-22).

Promotion of collegiate and professional culture, good 
career opportunities, study support and overseas 
secondments.

Remuneration policy and share-based remuneration 
schemes align key personnel and promote retention.

The Group continues to focus on succession planning 
to mitigate the risk from over-reliance on key personnel, 
as illustrated by the change in CIO and restructure of 
the Client Team during the year.

Growth agenda under the new strategy has increased 
the ability to attract talent on a global basis.

Experienced Board and senior management engage 
proactively with industry bodies and have a transparent 
and open relationship with regulators.

Investment in expertise, systems and training to ensure 
robust compliance culture maintained across the business.

The implementation of new Prudential regulations (IFPR) 
adds to the increase in regulatory change risk for FY-22.

Strategic report  

47

Operational risk

Operational risks are broad in nature and inherent in all activities and processes performed across the business, and all other businesses.

They include the risk that operational flaws result in business losses – through error or fraud, the inability to capitalise on market opportunities, 
or weaknesses in systems and controls.

Risk

Link to 
strategy

Rating

Change

Mitigating activities and update

High

Medium

1

2

1

2

Technology and information 
security risk – cyber security 
presents an ongoing significant 
risk to financial services 
companies, including the risk of 
failure of the Group’s technology 
and support systems, 
or penetration of such 
systems by third parties.

Potential impact – consequential 
loss of data, or the significant 
disruption to, or prevention of, the 
Group’s ability to operate, which 
could cause negative financial 
and reputational consequences.

Operational control 
environment – the risk of 
errors in execution and process 
management, legal, dealing, 
portfolio implementation, 
settlement, managing bespoke 
requirements and reporting and 
the risk of non-compliance 
including monitoring of 
investment breaches.

Potential impact – such errors or 
non-compliance could potentially 
lead to negative financial and 
reputational consequences.

Comprehensive disaster recovery (“DR”) and business 
contingency plans are in place and tested on a 
regular basis.

Information technology policies and technical standards 
are deployed across the Group, including induction and 
regular security awareness training.

Record continues to monitor, review and invest in its cyber 
and data security systems, incorporating input from the 
internal auditor and third party advisers.

Cyber-related metrics are monitored, reported and 
reviewed in monthly management information and 
Board information packs.

Throughout our industry, covid-19 has increased the 
risks associated with technology and information security 
systems. This includes the opportunity for criminals to 
exploit new vulnerabilities that may arise, for example 
through remote working. Whilst Record recognises this 
threat and invests and responds accordingly, the Group 
acknowledges the increase in the inherent risk associated 
with cyber attacks. 

Dedicated and experienced portfolio management team 
oversees the investment process.

Dedicated and independent Front Office Risk Management 
team provides pre and post-trade compliance assurances.

Compliance and Business Risk teams oversee adherence 
to formal and established procedures via a structured 
monitoring programme, reporting directly to the Risk 
Management Committee.

Automated post-trade compliance tests monitor whether 
programmes are running in line with expectations and 
allow timely resolution.

Annual ISAE 3402 and AT-C 320 service auditor’s report 
on internal controls independently reviewed and tested 
by RSM.

The Group has maintained the high standards around 
its operational control environment notwithstanding the 
impacts of covid-19, including the facilitation of full remote 
working for the majority of the year.

Key to strategy link
1  Quality client experience 

2  Technology and innovation

3  Talent development 

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information48 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Risk management continued

Investment risk

The risk that long-term investment performance is not delivered, damaging prospects for winning and retaining clients, and putting management 
fee rates under pressure.

Risk

Link to 
strategy

Rating

Change

Mitigating activities and update

1

2

3

1

2

Product underperformance 
– the risk that long-term 
investment performance is not 
delivered.

Potential impact – damages 
prospects for winning and 
retaining clients, minimises 
revenues through reduced 
management and performance 
fees and may cause 
reputational damage.

Market liquidity risk – the risk 
of reduced or constrained market 
liquidity, which would affect 
Record’s investment process as 
it relies on trading a high turnover 
of client positions in both size 
and volume.

Potential impact – a reduction 
in market liquidity or the 
non-functioning of financial 
markets could affect Record’s 
ability to meet its contractual 
obligations to clients, resulting 
in outflows and reductions 
to revenue.

High

Experienced Investment Committee meets regularly, 
ensuring consistent core investment processes are applied.

Low

Dedicated currency management research and 
investment focus.

Diversification, both through offering multiple strategies that 
benefit from opposing market conditions i.e. “risk-on” and 
“risk-off”, and through a client base which is diverse in 
geography and base currency.

Remuneration policy links senior management’s 
remuneration to long-term performance of the Group.

Product underperformance risk will be further diversified 
with the future launch of the Record EM Sustainable 
Finance Fund.

The Group has a large panel of banking counterparties it 
uses to trade on behalf of clients in currency and related 
instruments.

Currency is a particularly deep and liquid market that has 
continued to provide sufficient daily liquidity, despite 
disruptive market “shock” events such as the result of the 
EU referendum in June 2016 and more recently the impact 
of the covid-19 pandemic.

Market conditions have recovered from the lack of 
liquidity and temporary market dislocations evident 
during the pandemic.

Key to strategy link
1  Quality client experience 

2  Technology and innovation

3  Talent development 

Strategic report  

49

Changes in our industry such as the 
increase in demand for sustainable 
investment products and advances in 
technology provide both challenge but also 
opportunity to the Group, and economic 
uncertainly linked to the long-term impact 
of covid-19 will persist for the foreseeable 
future. Through its change in strategy and 
increased focus on growth, combined with 
the continued enhancement of its products 
and services and in maintaining its 
approach to innovation and the use of 
technology, the Directors believe the 
Company to be capable of meeting such 
challenges, as evidenced by the growth 
and diversification of AUME seen over the 
year. However, the Directors consider a 
three-year horizon over which to assess 
the viability of the Group to be appropriate 
under such circumstances, since it 
provides a sharper focus and any further 
planning horizon provides a greater level 
of uncertainty to financial projections.

Upon review of the results of the stress 
testing, the Directors concluded that the 
Group would have sufficient capital and 
liquid resources to withstand the stressed 
scenarios and ensure its ongoing viability, 
based on current information and the 
three-year viability horizon.

The scenarios assume mitigating actions 
including the potential for non-critical cost 
reductions and reassessing the dividend 
policy, although any mitigating actions 
would need to be reassessed depending 
on the specific circumstances and 
expected duration of the factors affecting 
the business model at the time. The 
possibility that the impact and timing of 
factors potentially affecting the viability of 
the Group could be more severe than 
assumed plausible for the above testing 
should also be noted.

As discussed in more detail on page 44, 
the impact of covid-19 on our business has 
been limited to managing the change in 
our physical working environment and 
practices, and in ensuring the wellbeing of 
our employees and their families. We have 
maintained both continuity in operational 
and client servicing matters as well as our 
independence without the need for 
additional funding or the use of 
government-related schemes.

However, a degree of uncertainty remains, 
for example linked to the ability of the 
vaccines to contain potential new strains 
of the virus and the corresponding 
potential impact upon the global recovery. 
Consequently, the market downturn 
scenario has been the subject of further 
focus. The updated scenario assumed an 
immediate 40% reduction in AUME due to 
market movements with minimal recovery 
over the viability assessment period, and 
with management actions limited only to 
the cessation of dividend payments. 
Notwithstanding such a severe and 
immediate decrease in AUME and hence 
revenues, the Group remained viable, 
retaining a strong capital position 
significantly in excess of its regulatory 
requirement supported by significant 
liquid resources.

Viability statement

In accordance with the UK Corporate 
Governance Code, the Directors have 
performed a robust assessment of the 
viability of the Group considering the 
business model, the Group’s expected 
financial position, Board strategy and risk 
appetite, the Group’s solvency and liquidity 
and its principal risks. Based on this 
assessment, the Directors have a current 
and reasonable expectation that the 
Group will continue to operate and meet 
its liabilities as they fall due up to 
31 March 2024.

The Directors review the financial forecasts 
and position of the Group on an ongoing 
basis. The capital and dividend policy 
reflects the stated objectives of maintaining 
a strong balance sheet whilst allowing the 
Group the flexibility to adapt its products 
and services to market conditions, or to 
take advantage of emerging business 
opportunities. The Group’s strategy and 
principal risks are assessed and reviewed 
regularly at Board and Executive level, and 
by operational sub-committees within the 
Group. Further detail on the Group’s 
strategy and principal risks is given in the 
Strategic report on pages 20 to 23 and 
44 to 48 respectively.

In assessing the viability of the Group the 
Directors have considered the principal 
risks affecting the Group, which underpin 
the basis for the stress testing of the 
business plan conducted as part of the 
Group’s Internal Capital Adequacy 
Assessment Process (“ICAAP”). The ICAAP 
uses severe but plausible stress scenarios 
assuming the crystallising of a number of 
these principal risks to assess the options 
for mitigating the impact on the Group, and 
for ensuring that the ongoing viability of the 
Group is sustained. Such scenarios include 
items that may have a severe effect on the 
revenue generation capability and resulting 
profitability of the Group, for example:

•  market downturn – resulting in AUME 
decreasing, either through outflows  
and/or a reduction in value due to the 
link to other financial markets; 

•  operational risk event – causing AUME 
outflows and potentially reputational 
damage; and

•  the loss of key personnel – resulting in 
the loss of AUME or the inability to win 
new clients.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information50 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Governance

In this section

Chairman’s introduction 

Board of Directors 

Corporate governance report 

Corporate governance overview 

Board structure 

Board activity 

Board effectiveness 

Corporate governance framework 

Internal control and risk management  

Nomination Committee report 

Audit and Risk Committee report 

Remuneration report 

Chair of the Remuneration Committee’s statement  

Remuneration Policy 

Annual report on remuneration  

Directors’ report 

Directors’ responsibilities statement 

51

52

54

54

56

58

59

60

61

62

64

70

70

72

77

86

89

Governance  

51

Chairman’s introduction

Effective corporate governance is 
key to the long-term success of 
any business. In this section of the 
Annual Report we set out our 
extensive corporate governance 
arrangements and describe the 
operation of the Board and its 
Committees during the year.

The financial year has been dominated by 
the covid-19 pandemic and the business 
has adapted well and operated successfully 
with minimal interruption to its operations. 
This is thanks in part to the strong and 
robust corporate governance framework 
which the Group has in place, together with 
the fact that the Board and its Committees 
have worked closely with the Group’s highly 
experienced management team to support 
Record’s operational teams in continuing to 
deliver a high-quality range of products and 
services to our clients.

I am confident that the Group’s governance 
arrangements are both appropriate and 
effective and that going forward the Group 
will continue to embrace regulatory, 
governance and best practice changes in 
its drive to best serve all its stakeholders.

Neil Record
Chairman

16 June 2021

Neil Record
Chairman

Company purpose
To deliver innovative, thought leading and 
practical solutions to the needs of currency 
market users and investors, while 
maintaining independence and integrity.

Corporate culture
Since the business was first established 
in 1983, Record has endeavoured to put 
the interests and needs of our clients first 
and this cultural belief is encouraged and 
deeply embedded within all business 
functions. The Board has worked hard to 
ensure that the importance of client focus 
through diligence, transparency, 
accountability and probity has been 
disseminated to all staff, contractors and 
consultants across the Group.

Corporate governance framework
The Board has established a framework of 
committees and sub-committees to ensure 
robust corporate governance practices 
throughout the business. The Board is 
confident that this structure is appropriate 
and that the delegation of responsibilities 
allows the business to operate in a 
structured manner and to respond rapidly 
when issues arise.

Further information on the corporate 
governance framework is provided on 
pages 60 and 61.

Compliance with the 2018 UK 
Corporate Governance Code
Throughout 2020, the Company has 
applied the main principles and provisions 
of the Code as deemed appropriate to 
Record. Pages 54 and 55 provide an 
overview of how the Code has been 
applied and Record’s departures from 
the Code are fully explained.

Section 172 disclosure
Section 172 of the Companies Act 2006 
requires directors to promote the success 
of the company for the benefit of the 
members as a whole and in doing so to 
have regard to the interests of 
stakeholders including clients, employees, 
suppliers, regulators and the wider society 
in which it operates. Details of how the 
Board engaged with Record’s various 
stakeholders are shown on pages 34 
and 35.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information52 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Board of Directors

The Board of Record plc is a highly skilled and committed group of 
individuals who are focused on understanding Record’s strengths and 
the challenges the Group faces.

Neil Record
Chairman

Leslie Hill
Chief Executive Officer

Steve Cullen
Chief Financial Officer

Jane Tufnell
Senior Independent Director

Appointed: 
Leslie joined Record in 1992. She 
was appointed Head of Sales and 
Marketing in 1999, and Chief 
Executive Officer in February 2020.

Previous appointments: 
Leslie’s extensive prior experience 
includes working at Lloyds Bank 
and Merrill Lynch where she was 
Director and Head of Corporate 
Foreign Exchange Sales worldwide.

Current external appointments: 
Leslie is a director of Trade 
Record Ltd.

Skills and experience: 
Having worked at Record for 
almost 30 years Leslie has a deep 
understanding of Record’s products 
and the needs of clients. As 
Head of the Client Team she 
was instrumental in driving the 
client-focused culture of the 
business and helped to maintain 
existing and develop new client 
relationships. Leslie is therefore 
very well placed to provide a client 
perspective during Board 
discussions. 

This extensive experience means 
Leslie as CEO is ideally suited to 
leading Record in the current 
client-led changing environment and 
to ensuring that it thrives within it.

Appointed: 
Steve was appointed to the Board 
and made Chief Financial Officer in 
March 2013.

Previous appointments: 
Steve qualified as a Chartered 
Accountant in 1994 and gained 
15 years of audit experience within 
public practice before joining 
Record.

Current external appointments: 
Steve has no other appointments 
outside of the Record Group.

Skills and experience: 
Steve joined Record in October 
2003 and led Record’s Finance 
team for over nine years reporting 
directly to the Chief Financial Officer. 
He was part of the internal 
management team at Record 
involved in the preparation for 
admission to trading on the London 
Stock Exchange in December 2007.

With his ICAEW FCA qualification 
and over 30 years’ experience, 
including over 17 years within 
financial services, Steve brings 
considerable accounting, financial 
and risk management expertise to 
the Board.

Appointed: 
Jane was appointed as a 
Non-executive Director in 
September 2015 and became 
the Senior Independent Director 
in October 2018.

Previous appointments: 
Jane co-founded the investment 
management firm Ruffer in 1994, 
and served on its management 
board until her retirement in 
June 2014. 

Current external appointments: 
Jane is the chair of Odyssean 
Investment Trust plc and ICG 
Enterprise Trust plc and is an 
independent non-executive 
director of Schroder UK Public 
Private Trust plc.

Skills and experience: 
Jane has a wealth of investment 
management expertise and her 
experience as a non-executive 
director on other boards means she 
is well placed to bring valuable 
market experience and good 
business insight to the Board in 
order to drive the business forward. 
Jane’s experience on other boards 
also positions her well to serve as 
Senior Independent Director.

Committee memberships: 

A

RN *

Appointed: 
Neil founded Record in 1983 and 
has been its principal shareholder 
and Chairman since then. Neil also 
served as Record’s CEO until 
October 2010.

Previous appointments: 
Prior to founding Record Neil 
was an economist at the Bank 
of England and worked in the 
commodity and currency trading 
department at Mars Inc’s UK 
subsidiary.

Current external appointments: 
Neil is Chairman of the Board of 
The Institute of Economic Affairs and 
a director of IEA Forum Limited, 
Chairman of The Global Warming 
Policy Forum and a director of Aims 
of Industry Limited, Oxford Festival of 
the Arts and Circular Wave Limited.

Skills and experience: 
As founder of the business Neil 
remains integral to the development 
of Record’s products and the 
direction of business strategy. 
As Chairman he is a strong 
figurehead, well-known and 
well-respected within the field of 
currency management and as 
such is an asset to the Board.

Neil is the author of numerous 
books and articles on currency and 
other risk management topics and 
is a frequent speaker at industry 
conferences and seminars 
worldwide.

Committee memberships: 

N

Governance  

53

Rosemary Hilary
Non-executive Director

Tim Edwards
Non-executive Director

Appointed: 
Tim was appointed as a 
Non-executive Director of Record 
in March 2018.

Previous appointments: 
Previously, Tim was a member of 
the governing Board of InnovateUK, 
the UK’s innovation agency, a 
director of the UK Cell and Gene 
Therapy Catapult and chair of the 
UK BioIndustry Association.

Current external appointments: 
Tim is a biotech entrepreneur, who 
is currently chair of Schroder UK 
Public Private Trust, Karus 
Therapeutics Limited and Storm 
Therapeutics Limited, and a director 
of AstronauTX Limited.

Skills and experience: 
Tim is a Chartered Accountant 
(FCA) with a background in 
corporate finance and venture 
investing, and he has extensive 
corporate development and people 
management experience. Tim adds 
insight to Board discussions 
ensuring that the Board continues 
to focus on mid to long-term value 
development.

Committee memberships: 
A N R *

Appointed: 
Rosemary was appointed as a 
Non-executive Director in 
June 2016. 

Previous appointments: 
Rosemary was previously Chief 
Audit Officer of TSB Bank, and has 
held senior regulatory roles within 
the Bank of England, the FSA and 
then the FCA. Rosemary was 
formerly a member of the 
Investment Committee and Chair 
of the Risk and Audit Committee of 
the Pension Protection Fund (2016 
to 2019) and Trustee and member 
of the Audit, Risk and Finance 
Committee of Shelter, the 
homelessness charity.

Current external appointments: 
Rosemary is a non-executive 
director of Willis Limited, 
St. James’s Place plc, Vitality Life 
and Vitality Health. She is also a 
member of the MBA Advisory 
Board at Cass Business School. 

Skills and experience: 
Rosemary is a qualified accountant 
with expertise in governance, 
business risk and control, and has 
strong knowledge of the asset 
management, insurance and 
banking sectors. Rosemary 
provides support and challenge to 
Record’s management, and in doing 
so helps the Board maintain its 
strong governance framework.

Committee memberships: 
RNA *

Gender diversity
As at year end and as at 
the date of report

Female
50%

Male
50%

Board tenure
As at year end

> 6 yrs
50%

3-6 yrs
50%

A

N

R

   Audit and Risk  

Committee

   Nomination  
Committee

   Remuneration 
Committee

Chair

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
54 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Corporate governance report

Corporate governance overview
Compliance with the UK Corporate 
Governance Code (the “Code”)
The Board is supportive of the principles of 
the Code and has been since its Admission 
to the Official List of the UK Listing 
Authority in December 2007, with the 
Board complying as it deems appropriate 
given the nature and size of the business. 

The latest version of the Code was 
published in July 2018 and is applicable 
to accounting periods beginning on or 
after 1 January 2019. 

Copies of the Code can be obtained from 
the FRC’s website at www.frc.org.uk. 

Listed companies are required under the 
Financial Conduct Authority Listing Rules 
either to comply with the provisions of the 
Code or explain to investors in their next 
Annual Report why they have not done so.

The Code consists of the 18 principles set 
out in this table; each is cross-referenced to 
the relevant section of this Annual Report.

Board Leadership & 
Company Purpose

Division of Responsibilities 

A. A successful company is led by an 
effective and entrepreneurial board, whose 
role is to promote the long-term sustainable 
success of the company, generating value for 
shareholders and contributing to 
wider society.

Board of Directors, pages 52 and 53  
Board structure, page 56  
Our stakeholders, pages 34 and 35

B. The board should establish the company’s 
purpose, values and strategy, and satisfy itself 
that these and its culture are aligned. All 
directors must act with integrity, lead by 
example and promote the desired culture.

Strategic priorities and goals, pages 20 
to 23

C. The board should ensure that the 
necessary resources are in place for the 
company to meet its objectives and measure 
performance against them. The board should 
also establish a framework of prudent and 
effective controls, which enable risk to be 
assessed and managed.

Key performance indicators, pages 24 to 27 
Risk management, pages 42 to 48 
Governance framework, pages 60 and 61  
Audit and Risk Committee report, pages 64 
to 69

D. In order for the company to meet its 
responsibilities to shareholders and 
stakeholders, the board should ensure 
effective engagement with, and encourage 
participation from, these parties.

Our stakeholders, pages 34 and 35

E. The board should ensure that workforce 
policies and practices are consistent with the 
company’s values and support its long-term 
sustainable success. The workforce should 
be able to raise any matters of concern.

Our stakeholders, pages 34 and 35 
Sustainability report, pages 28 to 35

F. The chair leads the board and is 
responsible for its overall effectiveness in 
directing the company. They should 
demonstrate objective judgement throughout 
their tenure and promote a culture of 
openness and debate. In addition, the chair 
facilitates constructive board relations and the 
effective contribution of all non-executive 
directors, and ensures that directors receive 
accurate, timely and clear information.

Board structure, page 56  
Board activity, pages 58 and 59

G. The board should include an appropriate 
combination of executive and non-executive 
(and, in particular, independent non-executive) 
directors, such that no one individual or small 
group of individuals dominates the board’s 
decision-making. There should be a clear 
division of responsibilities between the 
leadership of the board and the executive 
leadership of the company’s business.

Board structure, page 56  
Nomination Committee report, pages 62 
and 63

H. Non-executive directors should 
have sufficient time to meet their board 
responsibilities. They should provide 
constructive challenge, strategic guidance, 
offer specialist advice and hold management 
to account.

Board structure, page 56  
Nomination Committee report, pages 62 
and 63

I. The board, supported by the company 
secretary, should ensure that it has the 
policies, processes, information, time and 
resources it needs in order to function 
effectively and efficiently.

Board structure, page 56  
Board activity, pages 58 and 59  
Governance framework, pages 60 and 61

 
Governance  

55

Audit, Risk & Internal Control 

Remuneration 

Composition, Succession 
& Evaluation

J. Appointments to the board should be 
subject to a formal, rigorous and transparent 
procedure, and an effective succession plan 
should be maintained for board and senior 
management. Both appointments and 
succession plans should be based on merit 
and objective criteria and, within this context, 
should promote diversity of gender, social and 
ethnic backgrounds, cognitive and personal 
strengths.

Nomination Committee report, 
pages 62 and 63

K. Consideration should be given to the 
length of service of the board as a whole and 
membership regularly refreshed.

Nomination Committee report, pages 62 
and 63

M. The board should establish formal and 
transparent policies and procedures to ensure 
the independence and effectiveness of 
internal and external audit functions and 
satisfy itself on the integrity of financial and 
narrative statements. 

Directors’ report, pages 86 to 88  
Audit and Risk Committee report, 
pages 64 to 69  
Financial review, pages 39 to 41  
Risk management, pages 42 to 48

N. The board should present a fair, balanced 
and understandable assessment of the 
company’s position and prospects.

Audit and Risk Committee report, 
pages 64 to 69  
Strategic report, pages 1 to 49

L. Annual evaluation of the board should 
consider its composition, diversity and how 
effectively members work together to achieve 
objectives. Individual evaluation should 
demonstrate whether each director continues 
to contribute effectively.

O. The board should establish procedures to 
manage risk, oversee the internal control 
framework, and determine the nature and 
extent of the principal risks that the company 
is willing to take in order to achieve its 
long-term strategic objectives.

Board effectiveness, page 59  
Nomination Committee report, pages 62 
and 63

Audit and Risk Committee report, 
pages 64 to 69  
Risk management, pages 42 to 48

P. Remuneration policies and practices 
should be designed to support strategy and 
promote long-term sustainable success. 
Executive remuneration should be aligned to 
company purpose and values, and be clearly 
linked to the successful delivery of the 
company’s long-term strategy.

Remuneration report, pages 70 to 85

Q. A formal and transparent procedure for 
developing policy on executive remuneration 
and determining director and senior 
management remuneration should be 
established. No director should be involved in 
deciding their own remuneration outcome. 

Remuneration report, pages 70 to 85

R. Directors should exercise independent 
judgement and discretion when authorising 
remuneration outcomes, taking account of 
company and individual performance, and 
wider circumstances.

Remuneration report, pages 70 to 85

The Board has reviewed the 
appropriateness of the provisions to 
determine whether they should be applied 
or if departure is justified. All provisions of 
the Code have been applied as necessary 
as part of Record’s corporate governance 
framework except for the following:

•  Provision 9 of the Code recommends 
that the chair should be independent 
on appointment. Neil Record is deemed 
to be a controlling shareholder and so 
was not independent on appointment. 
However, the Board is of the opinion 
that the potential issue of 
non-independence is outweighed by 
the attributes of leadership and 
guidance that Neil brings to the role.

•  Provision 19 of the Code recommends 
that the chair should not remain in post 
beyond nine years from the date of first 
appointment to the board. Neil Record 
founded the Record Group in 1983 
and led the business until its IPO in 
December 2007. At the time of the IPO 
it was agreed Neil was best placed to 
continue to chair the business, a role he 
has undertaken ever since.

Neil is well-known and well respected 
within the field of currency management 
and his long established involvement 
with the business, his ideas and 
character have built the business to 
what it is today. The Board is of the 
opinion that Neil continues to add 
considerable value and that retaining 
him as Chairman is therefore justified for 
the foreseeable future. Details of the 
Nomination Committee’s review of the 
tenure of the Chairman conducted in 
2021 together with its conclusion are 
provided on page 63.

•  Provision 21 of the Code recommends 
that the chair should consider having 
a regular externally facilitated board 
evaluation. In FTSE 350 companies 
this should happen at least every three 
years. As a non-FTSE 350 company 
the triennial requirement for an external 
assessment does not apply to Record 
plc and to date has not been considered 
necessary. Details of the evaluation 
process conducted in 2021 which 
incorporated a workshop facilitated 
externally are provided on page 63.

•  Provision 38 of the Code recommends 
that the pension contribution rates for 
executive directors, or payments in lieu, 
should be aligned with those available to 
the workforce. Historically, the pension 
contribution rates for Executive Directors 
have been higher than the rest of the 
workforce; this discrepancy has now 
been addressed effective 1 April 2021. 
Details of how pension contribution 
rates are being aligned across the 
business are provided in the 
Remuneration report on page 73.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information56 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Corporate governance report continued

Board structure
Board composition
The Record plc Board consists of six 
members and is headed by Neil Record 
(Chairman), with the Executive Directors, 
Leslie Hill (Chief Executive Officer) and 
Steve Cullen (Chief Financial Officer). There 
are currently three Non-executive Directors, 
Jane Tufnell, being the Senior Independent 
Director, Rosemary Hilary and 
Tim Edwards. The biographical details of 
the Board members are set out on pages 
52 and 53. 

In February 2021 Bob Noyen stepped 
down from the Record plc Board but 
remained as Chief Investment Officer and a 
director of Record Currency Management 
Limited. Mr Noyen subsequently resigned 
from the role of Chief Investment Officer 
and a director of Record Currency 
Management Limited effective 
31 March 2021, and is now retained by 
Record on a twelve-month consultancy 
contract. Further information on this Board 
change is detailed in the Nomination 
Committee report on page 62. There have 
been no new external appointments to the 
Board during the year.

Code provision
The Code recommends that at least half 
the board, excluding the chair, should be 
non-executive directors whom the board 
considers to be independent and the 
Board’s structure complies with this 
provision. The Board considers that the 
current composition is appropriate given 
the size and structure of the business.

The division of responsibilities between the 
Chairman and the Chief Executive Officer is 
clearly established, set out in writing and 
agreed by the Board.

Board responsibilities 
The Board has a schedule of matters specifically 
reserved for its decision and approval, which 
includes, but is not limited to:

•  determining the Group’s long-term strategy and 

objectives;

•  authorising significant capital expenditure;

•  approving the Group’s annual and interim reports 

and preliminary announcements;

•  the setting of interim and special dividends and 
recommendation of final dividend payments;

•  ensuring the effectiveness of internal controls;

•  the authorisation of Directors’ conflicts or possible 

conflicts of interest; and

•  communication with shareholders and the stock 

market.

Chairman 
The Chairman is responsible for leadership of the Board. He is also 
responsible for overseeing the activities of the Chief Executive Officer and 
providing advice, guidance and support to the executive team. He works 
with the Board to develop Group strategy and support its implementation. 
The Chairman is a principal ambassador of Record and a guardian of the 
Group’s ethos and values.

Chief Executive Officer
The Chief Executive Officer is responsible for the executive management of 
the Group to grow the business profitably while acting in the interests of all 
stakeholders – clients, shareholders, employees and industry regulators – 
and upholding the core values of Record. Her statement on FY-21 and the 
outlook for the Group can be found on pages 6 and 7. 

Chief Financial Officer
The Chief Financial Officer is responsible for the finance function, the financial 
management and control of the business, and for developing and delivering 
appropriate internal and external financial reporting. His financial review for 
FY-21 can be found on pages 39 to 41.

Senior Independent Director 
The Senior Independent Director’s role is to act as a sounding board for the Chairman, oversee the evaluation of the Chairman’s 
performance (see page 63) and serve as an intermediary for the other Directors if necessary. She is also available as an additional 
point of contact for shareholders and other stakeholders should they wish to raise matters with her rather than the Chairman or the 
Chief Executive Officer.

Non-executive Directors 
The Non-executive Directors are responsible for upholding high standards of integrity and probity; providing constructive challenge 
and helping to develop proposals on strategy.

Governance  

57

Non-executive Directors’ letters of 
appointment stipulate that they are 
expected to commit sufficient time to 
discharge their duties. Non-executive 
Directors are required to notify the 
Chairman before taking on any additional 
appointments. Details of other roles held 
by the Non-executives are set out in their 
biographies on pages 52 and 53. The 
Board is satisfied that all Directors continue 
to be effective and demonstrate 
commitment to their respective roles.

The Executive Directors are employed 
on a full-time basis and do not have any 
other significant commitments outside 
of the Record Group. Neil Record, as 
Non-executive Chairman, works on a 
part-time basis. 

For details of Executive Directors’ service 
contracts, termination arrangements and 
Non-executive Directors’ letters of 
appointment, please refer to the 
Remuneration report, page 84.

Board member diversity
The Board has approved a policy for 
ensuring Board member diversity and 
has delegated the responsibility for 
addressing Board diversity to the 
Nomination Committee. The Nomination 
Committee reviews Board composition 
in the context of diversity and reports its 
recommendations to the Board to ensure 
diversity is achieved. 

The Board acknowledges the importance 
of diversity in the boardroom in its broadest 
sense as a driver of board effectiveness. 
Diversity encompasses diversity of 
perspective, experience, background, 
psychological type and personal attributes. 
The Board recognises that gender diversity 
is a significant aspect of diversity and 
acknowledges the important role that 
women with the right skills and experience 
can play in contributing to diversity of 
perspective in the boardroom. The Group’s 
Board Diversity Policy sets out that the 
Board will endeavour to ensure that the 
minority gender on the Board represents 
at least one-third of the Board.

The Board currently has three female 
members in a board of six and thus women 
make up 50% of the Board. The Board’s 
opinion is that the current composition of 
members comprises a good mixture of 
skills, experience, knowledge and 
backgrounds and is therefore appropriate 
for the business at the present time. Future 
Executive Director succession planning will 
take into account the benefits of diversity 
including gender diversity as set out in the 
Group’s Board Diversity Policy. Diversity 
in the workplace is described on pages 
31 and 32.

Independence of the 
Non-executive Directors
In determining the independence of 
Non-executive Directors, the Board has 
taken into consideration the guidance 
provided by the Code. The Board considers 
Jane Tufnell, Rosemary Hilary and 
Tim Edwards to be independent at the 
current time. Neil Record is a 
Non-executive Chairman, although he 
is not considered to be independent.

Director appointments 
and time commitment
The rules providing for the appointment, 
election, re-election and the removal of 
Directors are contained in the Company’s 
Articles of Association.

The Company’s Articles of Association 
were revised in 2020 to align with the UK 
Corporate Governance Code July 2018, 
current legislation and market practice and 
were subsequently approved by 
shareholders at the 2020 AGM. Under the 
Articles all Directors are subject to annual 
election by shareholders and all of the 
Directors will stand for re-election at 
the 2021 AGM, with the exception of 
Jane Tufnell who will be standing down 
for personal reasons. 

The Board has agreed that all Directors 
standing for re-election continue to make 
a valuable contribution to the Board’s 
deliberations and recommends their 
re-election. As required by the UK Listing 
Rules, the appointment of independent 
directors must be approved by a simple 
majority of all shareholders and by a simple 
majority of the independent shareholders. 
Further details are set out in the 2021 
Notice of AGM. 

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information58 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Corporate governance report continued

Board activity
Board focus and decision-making
The regular scheduled Board meetings 
have a set, strategically focused agenda 
and Board members are invited in advance 
of each meeting to add any additional 
issues they wish to be addressed. 

Updates from the chairs of the Nomination 
Committee, Remuneration Committee and 
Audit and Risk Committee are provided at 
each meeting.

Ongoing matters discussed included Brexit 
planning, the implementation of SMCR, 
global regulatory developments and the 
covid-19 pandemic.

During the year, the Board focused on 
the key matters detailed below:

Material circulated in advance of the 
meetings has included:

•  Minutes of the previous Board meetings

•  Executive Team meeting minutes

•  CEO report

•  KPI data pack

• 

• 

• 

Investment performance report

Investment Committee report 

IT strategy and systems report

•  Research activities report

•  Compliance and risk report

•  COO report

•  Head of HR report

•  Management information pack

March 2021

•  Group strategy and values (Strategy)

•  Budget FY-22 (Strategy, Finance)

February 2021

•  Board structure and CIO change 

(Strategy, Governance)

•  Company Secretary change (Governance)

•  Trade Finance investment 

(Strategy, Finance)

November 2020

•  Going concern review (Finance)

•  Interim review (Finance) 

•  Interim dividend proposal (Finance)

•  Board Diversity Policy (Governance)

•  Conflicts of interest framework and 

Conflicts of interest management and 
disclosure policy (Governance, Risk)

June 2020

•  Going concern and long-term viability 
review (Finance, Risk management)

•  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 and 

dividend proposal (Finance)

•  Amended Articles of Association for Record 

plc (Governance)

•  Revised Board and Committee terms of 

reference (Governance)

•  Group IT infrastructure strategy and budget

Key matters 
considered by the 
Board in the year to 
31 March 2021

July 2020 
(outside the normal meeting cycle)

•  Pillar 3 Disclosure (Risk management)

August 2020

•  Trade Record Ltd divestment 

(Strategy, Finance, Risk)

•  Establishment of the Executive 

Committee (Governance)

•  Establishment of a JSOP scheme 

(Workforce)

September 2020

•  Review of the Directors’ conflicts of 

interest register (Conduct)

•  Appointment of Panmure Gordon as 

corporate broker (Corporate)

•  Code of Ethics Parts I and II (Conduct)

Governance  

59

Meeting frequency and attendance
The Board met six times between 
1 April 2020 and 31 March 2021 to review 
financial performance and to follow the 
schedule of matters reserved for its 
decision and approval. Comprehensive 
Board papers, comprising an agenda and 
formal reports and briefing documents, 
are sent to Directors in advance of each 
meeting. Directors are regularly informed 
by senior executives and external advisers 
on the Group’s affairs, including 
commercial, regulatory, legal, corporate 
governance and other relevant matters.

Appropriate and timely notice is given of 
all Board meetings and all Directors receive 
information in advance so that if they are 
unable to attend, their input can be tabled 
and taken into consideration. The Board 
has regular offsite strategy meetings and 
additional meetings as required to address 
specific issues. As a result of the covid-19 
crisis no offsite strategy meetings were held 
during the year under review.

Any concerns raised by Directors which are 
not resolved are recorded in the Board 
minutes. No such matters were noted 
during the year ended 31 March 2021.

Directors are expected to attend all 
meetings of the Board. Details of Board 
meeting attendance are included in the 
table below:

Meetings in the year: 6 

Neil Record 

Jane Tufnell 

Rosemary Hilary 

Tim Edwards 

Steve Cullen 

Leslie Hill 

6/6

6/6

6/6

6/6

6/6

6/6

Bob Noyen attended five meetings before 
he stepped down from the Board in 
February 2021.

The Non-executive Directors met without 
the Executive Directors on several 
occasions throughout the year, prior to 
scheduled meetings.

Board effectiveness
Board induction and training
New Directors appointed to the Board 
receive advice as to the legal obligations 
arising from the role of a director of a 
UK-listed company as part of a tailored 
induction programme. This training includes 
briefings with the Chairman, Executive 
Directors and senior management to help 
new Directors familiarise themselves with 
their duties and the Group’s culture and 
values, strategy, business model, 
businesses, operations, risks and 
governance arrangements.

The Company Secretary, under the 
direction of the Chairman, is responsible 
for maintaining an adequate continuing 
education programme, reminding the 
Directors of their duties and obligations on 
a regular basis, ensuring good information 
flow between the Board, its Committees 
and management and assisting with 
Directors’ continuing professional 
development needs.

On an ongoing basis all Directors have 
access to independent professional advice, 
when required, at the Company’s expense 
as well as to the advice and services of the 
Company Secretary. 

Board performance evaluation
The Board is required by the Code to 
undertake an annual evaluation of its 
performance. The Code states that 
“There should be a formal and rigorous 
annual evaluation of the performance of 
the board, its committees, the chair and 
individual directors”.

The Code recommends that evaluation of 
the board of FTSE 350 companies should 
be externally facilitated at least every 
three years. 

A Board effectiveness workshop was 
conducted in March 2021 and further 
details are provided in the Nomination 
Committee report.

Individual appraisal of each Director’s 
performance is undertaken by the Chief 
Executive Officer and the Chairman. 
The Senior Independent Director conducts 
an annual appraisal of the performance 
of the Chairman with input from the other 
Board members. The outcome of these 
appraisals in 2021 was positive and all 
roles were considered to be 
undertaken effectively.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information60 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Corporate governance report continued

Board Committees
The Board has established three Board 
Committees and delegated authority to 
each Committee to enable it to execute its 
duties appropriately. The annual reports of 
the three Committees provide a statement 
of each Committee’s activities in the year:

•  Nomination Committee – report set out 

on pages 62 and 63;

•  Audit and Risk Committee – report set 

out on pages 64 to 69; and 

•  Remuneration Committee – report set 

out on pages 70 to 85.

The Committees operate on written terms 
of reference, which are reviewed annually 
and which are available on the Group’s 
website or on request from the Company 
Secretary at the registered office address. 
The Chair of each Committee reports 
regularly to the Board.

The work undertaken by the Nomination, 
Audit and Risk and Remuneration 
Committees was reviewed by the 
respective Committee Chair to assess each 
Committee’s effectiveness during the year. 
The reviews concluded that the 
Committees were operating in an effective 
manner and no concerns were raised and 
these conclusions were reported to the 
Board accordingly.

Corporate governance framework
The Board has established a framework of 
committees and sub-committees to ensure 
robust corporate governance practices 
throughout the business. The Board is 
confident that this structure is appropriate 
and that the delegation of responsibilities 
allows the business to operate in a 
structured manner and to respond rapidly 
when issues arise.

The diagram below gives an overview of 
the Group’s core governance framework.

Board

Board Committees

Nomination

Remuneration

Audit and Risk

Operational Committees

Executive

Investment

Risk Management

Operational Committees
The Board has also established three 
Committees responsible for operational 
oversight and decision-making as follows:

Executive Committee
Role: The Executive Committee with its 
sub-committees is the decision-making 
body for all day-to-day operations as 
delegated by the Board and Record plc’s 
subsidiaries. 

Members: During the year the Committee 
comprised the Chief Executive Officer as 
Chair, the Chief Financial Officer, the Chief 
Investment Officer, the Chief Operating 
Officer, the Head of Portfolio Management, 
the Head of Human Resources, the Head 
of Global Sales (April to December 2020) 
and the Head of Strategic Initiatives (from 
August 2020). Members of the senior 
management team are invited to attend 
as deemed appropriate. 

Meetings: The Committee meets formally 
once a month and holds regular operational 
update meetings. Standing agenda review 
items for formal meetings include clients 
and client prospects, the management 
accounts, departmental KPI data, 
compliance issues, systems development, 
projects and resourcing. Operational policy 
documents are regularly reviewed by the 
Committee prior to formal approval by the 
Board or the appropriate Board Committee. 
The Head of Compliance and Risk is a 
regular attendee of meetings (attending 
eight out of twelve meetings in the year 
under review). 

Reporting: Minutes of all meetings are 
circulated to the Board for review and 
comment.

Sub-committees: During the year two 
new sub-committees were created, 
reporting in to the Executive Committee, 
each responsible for on-the-ground 
decision-making, these being the Human 
Resources Committee consisting of the 
CEO, Head of HR and the HR Director, 
and the Technology Committee consisting 
of the COO, CTO/Head of Infrastructure, 
CTO and Head of Strategic Initiatives. 
The aim being to facilitate more timely 
and more effective decision-making.

Governance  

61

Investment Committee
Role: The Board has delegated the 
responsibility for authorising changes 
to existing investment processes and for 
approving new investment strategies to 
the Investment Committee. 

Members: The Committee consists of 
the Chief Investment Officer, the Chief 
Executive Officer, the Group Chairman, 
the Head of Portfolio Management and 
the Head of Investment Strategy. 

Meetings: The Committee meets as 
necessary, responding both to internal 
developments and external events. 

Reporting: Reports on the activities of the 
Committee are presented at each formal 
Board meeting for review and comment.

Risk Management Committee
Role: The Audit and Risk Committee has 
delegated to the Risk Management 
Committee the task of overseeing and 
mitigating operational risks arising across 
the activities of Record Currency 
Management Limited, the regulated entity 
within the Group. 

Members: The Chief Operating 
Officer (Committee Chair), the Head of 
Compliance and Risk, the Chief Financial 
Officer, the Head of Client Onboarding, the 
Head of Operations, the Head of Portfolio 
Implementation, the Head of Trading, the 
Head of Front Office Risk Management and 
the Head of Reporting are all members of 
the Committee. 

Meetings: The Committee meets at least 
once a month and as necessary in 
response to individual or specific events 
requiring review. 

Reporting: The minutes of meetings are 
circulated to the Audit and Risk Committee 
and a report on the Risk Management 
Committee’s activities is presented by the 
Chief Operating Officer, as the Committee 
Chair, at each Audit and Risk Committee 
meeting.

Internal control and risk management
The Board has overall responsibility for the 
Group’s systems of internal control and the 
management of significant risks. The Board 
sets appropriate policies on internal control 
which are reviewed annually, and authority 
is delegated to the following Committees 
and senior personnel to implement and 
apply those policies:

•  the Executive Committee;

•  the Audit and Risk Committee;

•  the Investment Committee; and

•  the Risk Management Committee.

The Board seeks ongoing assurance from 
these Committees and senior management 
about the effectiveness of the internal 
controls, which include operational and 
compliance controls, risk management and 
the Group’s high-level internal control 
arrangements. Such a system of internal 
controls is designed to manage, rather than 
eliminate, risk of failure to meet business 
objectives and can only provide reasonable 
and not absolute assurance against 
material misstatements or loss.

Further information on the Group’s risk 
management framework is provided on 
pages 42 to 48 of the Strategic report.

The Audit and Risk Committee has 
undertaken a review of the effectiveness 
of internal controls for the year ended 
31 March 2021 and is satisfied that the 
internal control environment is appropriate 
(see “Internal controls and risk 
management” on pages 67 and 68).

Approved by the Board and signed on 
its behalf by:

Kevin Ayles
Company Secretary

16 June 2021

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information62 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Nomination Committee report

This year the Nomination Committee 
has continued to focus on overseeing 
Board and senior management 
composition and I am confident 
we have a highly effective team to 
deliver value to our stakeholders.

Role of the Committee
The role of the Nomination Committee is 
to ensure that the Board has the optimal 
talents and experience to enable the 
Company to grow, compete in its 
markets and manage risks effectively.

The Committee serves both Record plc 
and the Group’s FCA regulated entity, 
Record Currency Management Limited. 

Committee meeting attendance
Jane Tufnell 

Rosemary Hilary 

Tim Edwards 

Neil Record 

7/7

7/7

7/7

7/7

Jane Tufnell
Chair of the Nomination Committee

Dear Shareholder

I am pleased to present the Nomination 
Committee report for the year ending 
31 March 2021. This will be my last report 
as Chair of the Nomination Committee as 
I will be stepping down from the Board 
at this year’s AGM on 27 July.

Key responsibilities
The key responsibilities of the Committee 
are to:

•  review the structure, size and 
composition of the Board and 
Committees including the diversity 
and balance of skills and experience;

•  consider succession planning for 

Directors and other senior management;

• 

identify and nominate for the approval of 
the Board candidates to fill Board 
vacancies; and

•  review annually the time commitment 
required of Non-executive Directors.

Membership of the Committee
The Committee has been chaired by 
Jane Tufnell since September 2016. 
Jane is supported by the other 
independent Directors, Rosemary Hilary 
and Tim Edwards, and the Group 
Chairman, Neil Record.

Committee meetings
The Committee met on seven occasions 
during the year ended 31 March 2021 
and invited the Chief Executive Officer, 
Company Secretary and the Head of 
Human Resources to join the meetings 
as the Committee considered appropriate. 
Committee member meeting attendance 
is detailed above.

The Chair of the Nomination Committee 
reported regularly to the Board on the 
Committee’s activities, identifying matters 
where any action was deemed to be 
required and making recommendations 
as considered appropriate.

Key areas of focus
Board composition
The Committee has continued to be aware 
of the need for the business to be more 
responsive to the needs and demands of 
clients in an ever evolving environment and 
to have a Board structure in place which 
ensures the Group can adapt and change. 
The Committee met in January to review 
the composition of the Record plc Board 
and, in conjunction with ongoing 
discussions with the Chief Investment 
Officer, Bob Noyen, determined it was 
in the best interest of the Group that 
he should focus on addressing clients’ 
demands and their currency exposures 
at an operational rather than strategic level. 
As a result of these discussions Bob Noyen 
elected to stand down from the Board of 
Record plc and this was approved by the 
Board on 4 February 2021. 

 
 
 
 
Governance  

63

Subsequently, Bob Noyen requested that 
he be retained on a consulting arrangement 
with the Group and the Board agreed this 
was acceptable. The Nomination 
Committee considered a proposal put 
forward by Leslie Hill as Chief Executive 
Officer to appoint Dmitri Tikhonov to the 
role of Chief Investment Officer and director 
of Record Currency Management Limited 
to replace Bob. The Committee considered 
Dmitri’s extensive investment experience 
built up over more than 18 years at Record 
and the work he had undertaken in his role 
of Chief Investment Risk Officer and agreed 
that he had the skills necessary to perform 
the Chief Investment Officer role effectively. 
A recommendation was put to the Board 
of Record Currency Management Limited 
accordingly at their meeting held on 
18 March 2021 and they expressed their 
full support and approval for Dmitri being 
appointed as Chief Investment Officer and 
director of Record Currency Management 
Limited to be effective 1 April 2021, subject 
to FCA approval. 

Extension of the appointment term 
for Tim Edwards
In March 2021 the Committee reviewed 
the extension of the appointment term for 
Tim Edwards as a Non-executive Director 
following its expiry after the initial three-year 
term, Tim having been appointed on 
22 March 2016. Tim was not present for 
this review. It was agreed that it was in the 
interests of both Record plc and Record 
Currency Management Limited that Tim 
be re-appointed on the same terms for a 
further period of three years, which may 
be extended further at the sole and 
absolute discretion of Record plc and 
Record Currency Management Limited. 
A recommendation was put to the Board 
accordingly and unanimously approved.

Board diversity
The Group’s Board Diversity Policy was last 
reviewed by the Committee in November 
2020. The Committee agreed the policy 
remained appropriate. The Committee has 
also acknowledged that future Executive 
Director succession planning should 
embrace the benefits of diversity, including 
gender diversity, to ensure that any 
individual selected will add to the Board’s 
mix of perspective, experience, background 
and personal attributes. 

The Committee is satisfied that the current 
composition of the Board is appropriate 
and meets the gender target set in the 
Group’s Board Diversity Policy. 

Tenure and effectiveness  
of the Chairman
The UK Corporate Governance Code 
recommends that the Chair should not 
remain in post beyond nine years from the 
date of their appointment to the Board. 
The Committee is aware that Neil Record 
has been in post since Record’s IPO in 
2007. The Committee has reviewed this 
tenure and has noted the benefits of 
continuity of the Board Chair during a 
period of continued transition for the 
business. Discussion of the issue by the 
Committee Chair with major shareholders 
has confirmed they remain confident with 
Neil’s ongoing tenure.

The Committee has concluded that 
Neil’s extensive experience in the currency 
industry as well as his leadership and 
challenge to the Board during this time of 
business transition supports the decision 
to retain him as Chair for the foreseeable 
future. The Committee Chair conducted 
a review of the Board Chair with all Board 
members in May 2021. The review 
concluded that Neil had made a very 
positive contribution in the period and he 
continues to provide valuable support to 
both the business and Leslie Hill as Chief 
Executive Officer. 

The tenure of the Chair will continue to 
be reviewed by the Committee on an 
annual basis.

Performance of the Directors 
and the Board
In September 2020 the Committee 
considered the outcome of the SMCR 
competency and performance reviews 
conducted in respect of all the Board 
members and senior managers. The 
Committee acknowledged it was content 
with the competency assessments and 
performance evaluations made and that 
it had no concerns regarding the 
performance of any of the individuals 
reviewed. 

A Board effectiveness workshop was 
conducted in March 2021, facilitated by 
an external company, Boardroom Review. 
They carried out interviews with Board 
members and reviewed information prior to 
a collective Board workshop discussing the 
strengths, challenges and contribution of 
the Board to the success and sustainability 
of the Company. Areas for focus were 
identified and the Board is aligning these 
actions with the implementation of 
the strategy.

In June 2021, the Committee reviewed 
the performance of the Board Committees. 
It concluded that the timetable of meetings, 
the issues addressed and the time 
committed by Non-executive Directors 
was appropriate. 

Looking forward
The Committee plans to focus on the 
specification of the future role profile for the 
Chief Executive Officer with consideration 
of the business transition taking place and 
what the Record Group of tomorrow will 
look like to facilitate succession planning for 
both the Chief Executive Officer and Chair 
roles.

Approved by the Committee and signed 
on its behalf by:

Jane Tufnell
Chair of the Nomination Committee

16 June 2021

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information64 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Audit and Risk Committee  
report

I am pleased to confirm the 
Committee has continued to be 
central to the oversight of the Group’s 
financial reporting, risk management, 
control and assurance processes and 
internal and external audit.

Rosemary Hilary
Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee

Role of the Committee
The role of the Audit and Risk 
Committee is to encourage and 
safeguard a high standard of integrity in 
financial reporting, risk management and 
internal controls for the Group, having 
regard to laws and regulations 
applicable to the Group and the 
provisions of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code.

The Committee serves both Record plc 
and the Group’s FCA regulated entity, 
Record Currency Management Limited. 
The Committee also monitors oversight 
of the US regulated entity Record 
Currency Management (US) Inc.

Committee meeting attendance
Rosemary Hilary 

Jane Tufnell 

Tim Edwards 

Dear Shareholder

I am pleased to present the Audit and 
Risk Committee report for the year ending 
31 March 2021.

Committee duties
Under its terms of reference the Committee 
is tasked with the following:

Internal controls, risk management and 
operational conflicts of interest:

•  monitoring and reviewing the Group’s 

internal financial controls and the internal 
control and risk management systems;

•  providing advice, oversight and 

challenge necessary to embed and 
maintain a supportive risk culture 
throughout the Group; and

8/8

8/8

8/8

•  reviewing the conflicts of interest 

framework and making 
recommendations to the Board and 
management as appropriate.

Compliance, whistleblowing, fraud and 
anti-money laundering:

•  considering and approving the remit of 
the Compliance & Risk function and 
challenging whether it has adequate 
resources and appropriate access to 
information to enable it to perform its 
function effectively and in accordance 
with the relevant professional standards;

•  overseeing whistleblowing arrangements 
by which staff may raise concerns about 
possible improprieties in financial 
reporting or other matters; and

•  reviewing the Group’s systems and 

controls for the prevention of bribery 
and reviewing the adequacy and 
effectiveness of the Group’s anti-money 
laundering systems and controls.

External audit:

•  making recommendations relating to 
the appointment, re-appointment and 
removal of the external auditor and 
overseeing any tender of external 
audit services;

•  approving the remuneration and terms 
of engagement of the external auditor;

•  reviewing and monitoring the 

independence and objectivity of the 
external auditor, and reviewing the 
effectiveness of the audit process, 
taking into consideration relevant 
UK professional and regulatory 
requirements; and

•  overseeing the provision of any non-audit 

services by the external auditor.

 
 
 
Governance  

65

Internal audit:

•  reviewing and approving the role, 

mandate and annual internal audit plan 
of the internal audit function, ensuring 
that the function has the necessary 
resources and access to information to 
enable it to fulfil its mandate;

•  monitoring and reviewing the 

effectiveness of the Group’s internal 
audit function; and

•  reviewing and monitoring management’s 
responsiveness to the internal auditor’s 
findings and recommendations.

Financial reporting:

•  monitoring the integrity of the Group’s 
financial statements, including the 
review of this Annual Report and any 
other formal announcements relating 
to the Group’s performance;

•  reviewing any significant financial 

reporting judgements;

•  reviewing the assumptions and any 
qualifications made in support of the 
going concern statement and the 
longer-term viability statement; and

•  reviewing the application and 

consistency of accounting policies and 
accounting standards.

The full terms of reference of the 
Committee were last updated and 
approved by the Board in June 2020; 
they comply with the UK Corporate 
Governance Code (the “Code”) and are 
available on the Group’s website or from 
the Company Secretary at the registered 
office address.

The Chair of the Committee provides 
regular reports to the Board detailing how 
the Committee has discharged its 
responsibilities as set out in its terms 
of reference.

Membership of the Committee
The Committee has been chaired by 
Rosemary Hilary since September 2016. 
Rosemary is supported by the other 
independent Directors: Jane Tufnell and 
Tim Edwards.

Given her accounting and regulatory 
background, the Board considers that 
Rosemary is the most appropriate 
independent Director for the role of Audit 
and Risk Committee Chair and this view 
is supported by the other members of the 
Committee. The Board is satisfied that by 
virtue of their experience gained in other 
organisations, the Committee members 
collectively have competence relevant to 
the sector in which the Group operates. 
The biographical details of the Committee 
members are set out on pages 52 and 53.

The composition of the Committee 
complies with the Code provision for 
smaller companies requiring at least two 
independent Non-executive Directors 
throughout the year.

Committee meetings
The Committee met eight times during the 
year ending 31 March 2021, being four 
quarterly meetings, two meetings ahead of 
results announcements and two additional 
meetings held as a result of the covid-19 
crisis. The meetings were also attended by 
the Chief Executive Officer, the Head of 
Compliance and Risk, the Chief Financial 
Officer and the Chief Operating Officer. 

Representatives from PwC for the period 
to 4 August 2020, and BDO thereafter, 
each attended three meetings as the 
incumbent external auditor and the Deloitte 
internal auditor partner attended all eight 
meetings. Minutes of the meetings were 
documented by the Company Secretary 
and retained on file.

Committee member meeting attendance 
for the year ending 31 March 2021 is 
detailed on page 64.

The Committee also separately met the 
Group’s external auditor on two occasions 
and the internal auditor on five occasions, 
providing an opportunity for them, 
privately and in confidence, to raise 
matters of concern. 

The Chair of the Committee reported 
regularly to the Board on the Committee’s 
activities, identifying any matters on which 
the Committee considered that action was 
required, and made recommendations on 
the steps to be taken.

Committee Chair meetings
During the year the Chair of the Committee 
has had separate discussions with the 
key people involved in the Company’s 
governance, including the Board Chairman, 
the Chief Executive Officer, the Chief 
Financial Officer, the Head of Compliance 
and Risk and also the external audit partner 
and the internal audit partner to obtain 
updates and insights into business activities.

Committee evaluation
An internal review of Committee 
effectiveness was overseen by the 
Company Secretary in May 2021. 
The review was based on input from Board 
members, senior management, the internal 
audit partner and the external audit partner. 
The conclusion was that the Committee 
was effective in carrying out its duties.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information66 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Audit and Risk Committee  
report continued

Committee activities
The Committee has discharged its 
responsibilities under its terms of reference 
for the period under review by the following 
actions:

•  reviewing the form, content and integrity 
of financial information prior to release, 
including the Annual and Interim 
Reports;

•  reviewing the content of each of the 
Interim Management Statements for 
subsequent Board approval;

•  reviewing the adequacy and 

effectiveness of the Group’s internal 
controls and risk management systems;

•  considering the Pillar 3 disclosures prior 
to their recommendation for acceptance 
by the Board;

•  receiving and reviewing internal audit 

updates and reports;

•  evaluating the performance and 

independence of the internal auditor 
during the engagement period;

•  reviewing the independence of the 

Group’s external auditor and the nature 
of non-audit services supplied by the 
auditor;

•  reviewing the external auditor’s audit 

strategy for the interim review and the 
final audit;

•  assessing the external auditor’s 

concluding report for the interim review 
and the year-end financial statements;

•  evaluating the performance of the 
external auditor over the period;

•  reviewing regular reports by the Head of 
Compliance and Risk detailing internal 
compliance and risk management 
activities and issues;

•  reviewing a “Risk Matrix” to ensure that 

key risks and risk movements are 
identified and addressed;

•  examining departmental KPI and KRI 
data to ensure operational risks are 
identified and appropriately addressed 
by management;

•  reviewing Risk Management Committee 
meeting minutes and summary activity 
reports by the Chief Operating Officer as 
Chair of the Risk Management 
Committee; and

•  reviewing and approving the Group’s 

whistleblowing policy.

Key areas of focus
Review of the regulatory landscape
Briefings on regulatory developments were 
provided to the Committee at each meeting 
by Deloitte as internal auditor and by the 
Head of Compliance and Risk. Topics 
included the Senior Managers and 
Certification Regime, Brexit, FCA policy and 
discussion statements, FRC guidance and 
regulatory changes in other jurisdictions 
relevant to Record. 

Brexit
The Committee closely monitored 
management’s Brexit preparations to 
ensure Record was suitably organised for 
all possible outcomes. Ahead of the end of 
the Brexit transition period the Committee 
was content that Record was suitably 
prepared and that Record could continue 
to serve all of its existing EU27 clients 
under existing investment management 
agreements from 1 January 2021. As part 
of its Brexit strategy Record established a 
German subsidiary, Record Asset 
Management GmbH, in November 2020. 

Technology and cyber security 
Given the extensive programme of 
technological developments being 
undertaken across the Group, the 
Committee has been keen to ensure that 
appropriate controls and processes are in 
place for all IT projects and all new systems 
implemented. The Committee has received 
regular updates from the Chief Technology 
Officer and the Head of Strategic Initiatives 
who also attended meetings to respond to 
the Committee’s questions. The Committee 
has received reassurance that there is 
appropriate management involvement 
and oversight of the IT projects being 
undertaken. The Committee has been 
satisfied that business risks are being 
considered and monitored and that 
controls are in place as necessary. 
The Committee will continue to challenge 
the Head of Strategic Initiatives to ensure 
successful delivery of Record’s 
technology strategy.

The Committee has remained conscious 
that cyber security presents an ongoing 
significant risk to financial services 
companies and has continued to monitor, 
review and challenge Record’s cyber and 
data security processes; management’s 
approach to developments and initiatives; 
and management’s response to issues 
identified internally, by the internal auditor 
and by third party advisers. Management 
are working to secure Cyber Essentials 
certification and the Committee is 
supportive of this initiative. The need to 
remain vigilant is recognised and cyber 
security will continue to be a key focus for 
the Committee going forward.

An internal vulnerabilities assessment was 
conducted by an external third party in 
December 2020 and management then 
implemented a plan to address the gaps 
identified. These gaps were not material 
and the Committee was content with the 
action proposed and taken by 
management.

Third party assurance services
RSM Risk Assurance Services LLP (“RSM”) 
was appointed in January 2020 to conduct 
the Reporting Accountant and Independent 
Service Auditor (ISAE 3402/AT-C 320) 
reports on internal controls on an annual 
basis. Their update report for 2021 was 
presented to and reviewed by the 
Committee in June 2021. 

Record Currency Management 
(US) Inc. activities
The Committee has been keen to ensure 
that oversight of the US subsidiary and the 
controls in place appropriately reflect its 
activities and, accordingly, they have 
sought and received ongoing assurances 
from both management and the Head of 
Compliance and Risk. 

During the year steps have been taken 
by management to enhance the 
documentation of US activities and 
compliance monitoring of the subsidiary 
and the Committee has been supportive 
of the developments made.

The Committee will continue to monitor the 
activity of the US entity to assess whether 
the control environment, management 
oversight and compliance oversight remain 
aligned with the risks of its business. 

Governance  

67

Conflicts of interest
During the year the Committee and the 
Board undertook a comprehensive review 
of the Conflict Management Framework 
together with the Conflicts of Interest Policy, 
the Gifts and Entertainment Policy and 
the Conflicts of Interest Register and 
relationships log. Both the Audit and Risk 
Committee and the Board confirmed 
they were comfortable with the conflicts 
of interest structures and controls then 
in place. 

Covid-19 response
The Committee requested and received 
regular business updates and monitored 
management’s ongoing response to the 
covid-19 crisis to ensure that appropriate 
processes and controls have remained in 
place during the period whilst all 
employees have been working from home. 
The Committee has welcomed the 
responsiveness of management to the 
situation and is supportive of the initiatives 
implemented to ensure the business has 
continued to operate under a strong control 
environment with no material impact on its 
trading activities or its financial 
reporting processes.

Financial reporting
The Committee has thoroughly reviewed 
the half-year and annual results and the 
Annual Report, before recommending them 
to the Board for approval. 

During the year, the Committee also 
considered the significant financial and 
regulatory reporting issues and judgements 
made in connection with the financial 
statements and the appropriateness 
of accounting policies. In particular, 
the Committee considered management 
reports providing assessments of the 
internal controls environment, the 
financial impact of the covid-19 pandemic, 
future cash flows, going concern and 
ongoing viability. 

The Committee was satisfied that all 
judgements made by management which 
affect financial reporting, including the 
consolidation of seed funds, have been 
made in accordance with the Group’s 
accounting policies and made a 
recommendation to the Board that it was 
appropriate for the Group to adopt the 
going concern basis of accounting in 
preparing the half-year and annual financial 
statements for the year ending 
31 March 2021.

The Committee further considered reports 
from the external auditor, in particular its 
independent assessment of financial 
reporting and key controls, the audit 
opinion on the Annual Report and the 
independent review report on the half-
year results.

The Committee is satisfied that the financial 
reporting control framework operated 
effectively after considering reports from 
both management and the external auditor.

The Committee has reviewed the narrative 
statements in the report and accounts 
to ensure they are fair, balanced and 
understandable and consistent with the 
reported results, and also reviewed the 
auditor’s findings report which identified 
no significant issues.

The Committee was satisfied with the 
content of the Annual Report, confirmed 
there were no significant issues or concerns 
to be addressed and recommended that it 
be approved by the Board.

Internal controls and risk management
A significant part of the work of the 
Committee is providing oversight and 
independent challenge to the internal 
controls and risk management systems 
of the Group. 

A “Risk Matrix”, which identifies key risk 
areas that may impact the Group and 
monitors them against the Board’s risk 
appetite, is used by the Committee and 
compared against a risk assessment 
prepared by the internal auditor to ensure 
that material risk areas are being 
appropriately identified and addressed 
by management and that movements in 
risks and associated business impact are 
identified promptly so that appropriate 
action can be taken. The use of the 
“Risk Matrix” to assist risk monitoring 
is welcomed by the Committee. 

The Committee has reviewed all minutes 
of Risk Management Committee meetings 
and the Chief Operating Officer as Chair 
of the Risk Management Committee was 
present at all meetings to answer 
questions raised. 

In July 2020 the Committee undertook 
a detailed review of the Group’s Pillar 3 
disclosures which had been prepared in 
accordance with the Capital Requirements 
Directive. The Committee members agreed 
they were satisfied with the disclosures 
made in the document and recommended 
the Pillar 3 Disclosures for the 
Board’s approval. 

The Committee has reviewed and 
evaluated the system of internal controls 
and risk management operated within the 
Group, and is satisfied that the internal 
control environment is appropriate. 
More information on the Group’s risk 
management framework is given in the 
Strategic report on pages 42 to 45.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information68 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Audit and Risk Committee  
report continued

Internal audit 
The internal audit function undertakes a 
programme of reviews as approved by the 
Committee, reporting the results together 
with its advice and recommendations to 
the Committee. The function is provided 
by Deloitte LLP (“Deloitte”) under an 
outsourcing contract which commenced 
in May 2010. The objectives and 
responsibilities of internal audit are set 
out in a charter reviewed and approved 
on an annual basis. The charter was last 
reviewed and approved by the Committee 
in April 2021. Deloitte reports directly to the 
Committee and the relationship is subject 
to periodic review.

Having been appointed by Record in 
July 2014 the Deloitte internal audit partner 
was approaching the seven-year maximum 
permitted tenure under the Internal Audit 
Code of Practice published by the 
Chartered Institute of Internal Auditors and 
so in March 2021 the Committee reviewed 
the CVs of potential new Deloitte partners, 
following which interviews were held and a 
new partner selected. 

The Committee and the internal auditor 
have developed a planning process to 
ensure that the audit work performed 
focuses on significant risks. The plans 
include deep-dive thematic and risk-based 
audits and also high level in-flight reviews 
of specific projects as agreed by the 
Committee, Deloitte and management. 
Each review is scoped at the start of the 
audit to ensure an appropriate focus 
reflecting business activities, the market 
environment and regulatory matters. 
The plans are periodically reviewed to 
ensure they are adapted as necessary to 
capture changes in the Group’s risk profile.

The Committee has received regular 
reports on the programme of reviews and 
internal audit findings at each of its 
meetings during the course of the year. 
The Committee has reviewed the findings 
and recommendations made by the internal 
auditor and has aimed to ensure that any 
issues arising are suitably addressed by 
management in an effective and 
timely manner.

The Committee has reviewed Deloitte’s 
work and discussed the delivery of internal 
audit with management and is satisfied with 
the internal audit work conducted and the 
coverage and standard of the reports 
produced. The Committee has monitored 
whether sufficient and appropriate 
resources are dedicated to the internal 
audit function and this has been reported 
to and noted by the Board.

External audit
Following an external audit tender process 
conducted in early 2020, detailed in the 
previous Annual Report, the Committee 
and Board’s recommendation to replace 
PwC LLP by appointing BDO LLP (“BDO”) 
was approved by shareholders at the 2020 
AGM held on 4 August 2020. On the 
engagement of BDO, Neil Fung-On was 
appointed lead audit partner and he has 
led the 2021 external audit process. BDO’s 
fees and the terms of the audit engagement 
letter for FY-21 were approved by the 
Committee in October 2020.

The Committee has reviewed reports from 
the external auditor on the audit plan 
(including the proposed materiality level for 
the performance of the annual audit), the 
status of its audit work and issues arising. 
The Committee discussed the findings with 
the auditor and was satisfied with the 
conclusion reached by the auditor that 
there was no evidence of material 
misstatements. The Committee has 
confirmed that no material items remained 
unadjusted in the financial statements.

An assessment of the quality and 
effectiveness of BDO’s FY-21 audit was 
considered by way of a review completed 
by the Committee with the assistance of 
senior members of the Finance Team and 
with reference to the FRC’s practice aid on 
assessing audit quality, published in 
December 2019. The Committee evaluated 
the judgements; mindset and culture; skills, 
character and knowledge; and quality 
control demonstrated by BDO throughout 
the audit process and concluded that BDO 
had provided a quality external audit service 
which was appropriate for the Group given 
its size and structure.

External auditor independence
Policy on provision of non-audit 
services by the external auditor
During the year the Committee operated 
a policy covering the provision of non-audit 
services by the external auditor to ensure 
that the ongoing independence and 
objectivity of the external auditor was not 
compromised. The policy adheres to the 
Financial Reporting Council’s revised 
Ethical Standard issued in December 2019. 
Under the Ethical Standard the aggregate 
of fees for all non-audit services, excluding 
audit-related assurance services required 
under regulation, may not exceed 70% 
of the average of the audit fees for 
the preceding three-year period. 
The Committee considers it best practice 
to adhere to the fee cap on an annual 
basis and monitors fees accordingly.

Governance  

69

Non-audit services undertaken by 
the external auditor
The following permitted non-audit services, 
pre-approved by the Committee and within 
a pre-determined cost limit, have been 
undertaken by BDO in the year 
under review:

• 

independent auditor report to the FCA 
on compliance with client asset rules; 
and

•  the interim review work performed on 

the half-year accounts.

Details of the total fees paid to BDO are set 
out in note 5 to the accounts. Non-audit 
fees, excluding audit-related assurance 
services required under law or regulation, 
were equivalent to 8% (2020: 20%) of audit 
fees and were therefore within the 
permitted cap of 70%.

Assessment of external 
auditor independence
The Committee was satisfied that the 
quantity and nature of non-audit work 
undertaken during the year did not impair 
BDO’s independence or objectivity and that 
its appointment for these assignments was 
in the best interests of the Group and 
its shareholders.

The Committee is satisfied that the external 
auditor has maintained its independence 
and objectivity over the period of 
its engagement.

Looking forward
As well as considering the standing items 
of business, the Committee will continue to 
focus on the following areas during the 
year ahead:

•  technology and cyber security;

•  the continued response to the covid-19 

crisis and transition back to office 
working; 

• 

internal capital adequacy and risk 
assessment and ongoing risk 
monitoring;

•  risk and controls as the Group’s strategy 
is implemented, including new product 
offerings;

•  oversight and monitoring of the Group’s 
regulated businesses based overseas; 
and 

•  the regulatory landscape in the UK and 
other jurisdictions relevant to Record.

Approved by the Committee and signed on 
its behalf by:

Rosemary Hilary
Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee

16 June 2021

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information70 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Remuneration report

Our remuneration policy is designed 
to act in the interests of all of our 
key stakeholders: our clients, 
shareholders, employees 
and regulators.

Role of the Committee
The role of the Remuneration 
Committee is to review and approve 
the remuneration strategies of the 
Group, encompassing the Chair, 
the Executive Directors, and the staff 
as a whole. The Committee also reviews 
and advises on the remuneration policy 
and ensures that it promotes good 
conduct consistent with sound and 
effective risk management, and is 
properly disclosed to stakeholders.

Committee meeting attendance
Tim Edwards 

Rosemary Hilary 

Jane Tufnell 

7/7

7/7

7/7

Tim Edwards
Chair of the Remuneration Committee

Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee’s statement
Introduction
I am pleased to present our Remuneration 
report for 2021. We believe that our 
Remuneration Policy, as approved by 
shareholders at our 2020 AGM, remains 
appropriate and we are proposing no 
further changes this year.

Our report is split into three sections:

•  the Remuneration Policy tables;

•  the annual report on remuneration 

for 2020-21; and 

•  the role and activity of the 
Remuneration Committee.

We have not reproduced our full 
Remuneration Policy in this report but 
have provided a summary in the tables 
produced on pages 72 to 76. A copy of 
our full Directors’ Remuneration Policy, 
as approved by shareholders in July 2020, 
is available in the Remuneration sections 
of the 2020 Annual Report and Accounts, 
which is available on our website  
www.recordcm.com.

This year, in line with the agreed 
Remuneration Policy, we have introduced a 
new element of remuneration, a Joint Share 
Ownership Plan (“JSOP”) for staff below 
Executive Director level as part of our 
succession and talent management 
strategy. The JSOP is designed for key staff 
to accelerate their acquisition of shares to 
further align their interests with those of 
shareholders. The scheme requires a 
financial commitment from the individual to 
participate, further aligning the individuals’ 
contribution and retention with business 
performance. Further details are provided 
in the Remuneration Policy tables. 
Furthermore, we used the flexibility in our 
Share Scheme such that management 
awarded the full allocation of share options 
to staff below Director level.

In our Remuneration Policy we committed 
to the alignment of pension contributions 
across the Group. From June 2020, 
contributions to Directors were decreased 
from 15.5% to 13.5% and since April 2021 
we have had alignment across the Group 
at a single rate of 11% to be paid to all 
staff, including Directors. Directors are able 
to contribute to a pension scheme or may 
receive payment in lieu if they have opted 
out of the pension scheme. 

 
 
 
Governance  

71

Remuneration principles
Our approach to remuneration is driven 
by long-term thinking to promote the 
sustainable growth of the Group. 
Identifying, developing and appropriately 
compensating our high performers, at all 
levels of the business, is critical to 
long-term business success and is aligned 
to both clients’ and shareholders’ interests.

Our key remuneration principles are:

•  A consistent remuneration structure 
for all employees, not just Directors, 
which is transparent and 
straightforward.

•  Our remuneration structures should 
reward and incentivise profitable 
business growth.

•  Remuneration should comprise two 

components: (i) a fixed salary; and (ii) a 
variable component based on individual 
performance.

•  Directors’ remuneration should include 
a deferred element which is satisfied by 
paying it in the form of equity.

Leadership and strategy
The Board’s priorities to position the firm for 
growth and establish a plan for succession 
in the most senior executive posts have 
progressed significantly this year. We are 
now well placed to continue to deliver 
modernisation, diversification and growth 
for next year. To reflect Leslie Hill’s 
leadership and critical value in delivering 
the change in strategy, her salary was 
increased to £650,000 from 1 April 2021. 
Leslie’s variable remuneration will continue 
to be based on her performance against 
agreed objectives.

As part of succession plans, Bob Noyen 
relinquished his role as Chief Investment 
Officer on 31 March 2021. Payments 
made to Bob on leaving were in line with 
our Remuneration Policy. Bob has 
agreed to assist with the transition and 
maintenance of client relationships by 
providing continued support over the 
next financial year.

Group performance for 2020-21
The year to 31 March 2021 has seen 
revenues stay in line with last year, but an 
increase in operating expenditure meant 
that operating profit decreased by 20%. 
Our AUME reached its highest ever value 
at $80.1 billion and our share price 
increased from 28 pence to 70 pence 
during the year. Our Group Profit Share 
Scheme pool was 34% of pre-GPS 
underlying operating profit, which 
represented £3.2 million, directly linking the 
Company’s financial performance to the 
size of the variable remuneration pool. 
The value delivered under the Group 
Profit Share Scheme decreased by 10% 
compared to the previous period.

Directors were awarded profit share units 
by the Remuneration Committee based 
on their individual level of performance 
measured against their objectives. 
Some discretion was exercised by the 
Committee in the allocation of these profit 
share units. Details can be found within 
the annual report on remuneration.

The Committee also received input from the 
Head of Compliance and Risk, who reports 
any legal or compliance issues that relate to 
Directors who are due to receive awards 
under the Scheme. Payments were made 
in accordance with the Group Profit Share 
Scheme rules and were approved by 
the Committee.

No option awards were made to Directors 
during the year and details of previous 
awards can be found on page 80 and all 
awards were made in accordance with 
the Scheme rules. No options vested for 
Directors during the year as the 
performance conditions had not been 
met. Details can be found on page 80.

Alignment with shareholders
As at 31 March 2021, 38% of the 
Company’s shares were held by the 
Chairman and Directors, and each of 
the current Executive Directors has a 
shareholding significantly greater than 
1.5 times their salary. In addition, 
68% of the Company’s employees 
are shareholders. 

Engaging with employees 
The Committee takes an active involvement 
in remuneration for the whole Company. 
Record staff participate in both the Group 
Profit Share Scheme and the Share Option 
Scheme and the Committee reviews all 
GPS and option awards. A significant 
proportion of our colleagues are 
shareholders, so are able to express their 
views in the same way as other 
shareholders.

When determining Executive Director 
remuneration arrangements the 
Committee takes into account pay 
conditions throughout the Group to 
ensure that the structure and quantum 
of Executive Directors’ pay remains 
appropriate in this context. 

In my role as Employee Engagement 
Director, leading our workforce engagement 
initiatives, we have been able to seek the 
views of the wider workforce on a range of 
topics including strategy, remuneration and 
working arrangements under the covid-19 
pandemic, through meetings and 
conversations with staff.

Shareholder consultation
It remains our policy to discuss any 
substantive proposed changes to the 
Group’s remuneration structures with key 
external shareholders in advance of any 
implementation. The Remuneration 
Committee takes into account shareholder 
views received in relation to resolutions to 
be considered at the AGM each year, and 
values shareholder feedback when forming 
remuneration policy.

Tim Edwards
Chair of the Remuneration Committee

16 June 2021

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information72 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Remuneration report continued

Remuneration Policy
Remuneration Policy summary tables
This section of the Remuneration report starts with a table illustrating the remuneration structures that we have in place for Executive 
Directors and then provides an overview of the key remuneration elements in place for all staff, including Executive Directors, the 
Chairman and Non-executive Directors. We have not made any changes to our Remuneration Policy for Directors and the tables 
summarise the policy approved by shareholders at the 2020 AGM.

Summary remuneration structure
The table below illustrates the remuneration structures that we have in place for Directors.

Options

Struck at market price with performance conditions

1/3 vests 
but held until 
year 5

1/3 vests 
but held until 
year 5

1/3 vests

1/3 shares 
released from 
lock up

1/3 shares 
released from 
lock up

1/3 shares 
released from 
lock up

Group Profit

Shares

Share Scheme

Cash

Pension and 
benefits

Cash

Salary

Cash

Year 0

Year 1

Year 2

Year 3

Year 4

Year 5

Note: Directors are required to take one-third of their Group Profit Share payment in shares, which are locked up and released over three years. Directors can elect 
to take a further third of their Group Profit Share payment in shares, and these have no lock up.

Remuneration Policy: comparison table for Executive Directors and staff
The table below provides a summary of the policy for each component part of remuneration for Executive Directors. The approach for 
all staff is also included to provide context for the remuneration for the entire workforce. 

Element, purpose  
and link to strategy

Current operation 
for employees

Policy for Executive Directors

Base salary 
Fixed remuneration that reflects the role, 
responsibilities, experience and 
knowledge of the individual.

Paid monthly and reviewed annually 
by management.

The Remuneration Committee reviews salaries for Executive 
Directors on an annual basis.

Any review will take into account market 
rates, business performance and 
individual contribution.

Any review will take into account market rates, 
business performance and individual contribution.

There is no prescribed maximum salary. However, increases 
are normally expected to be in line with the typical level of 
increase awarded across the Group.

Governance  

73

Element, purpose  
and link to strategy

Commission 
The Commission scheme is to reward 
and incentivise contributions to new 
business from the next generation. 
Any payments are authorised by the 
HR Committee and approved by the 
Remuneration Committee after input 
from the Head of Compliance and Risk.

The scheme operates within a risk 
management framework to ensure 
products are appropriate for clients 
and any payment is made from profits.

Benefits 
To provide a benefits package 
that provides for the wellbeing of 
our colleagues.

Share Incentive Plan 
The Group has an approved Share 
Incentive Plan (“SIP”). All staff are able to 
buy shares from pre-tax salary up to an 
HMRC-approved limit (£1,800 for the 
financial year ended 31 March 2021), 
which is matched at a rate of 50%.

Pension 
To provide an appropriate 
retirement income.

Group Profit Share Scheme 
Variable remuneration scheme that 
allocates 25% to 35% of operating 
profits to a Group Profit Share Pool, 
allocated to participants based on their 
role and individual level of performance.

Policy for Executive Directors

Executive Directors are not eligible to participate in 
the Commission scheme.

Current operation 
for employees

All staff can participate.

Staff will only receive a payment if they 
are meeting their individual performance 
objectives.

Code staff receive any payment in 
shares, locked up for a period of one 
year, whereas other staff will receive any 
payment in cash.

A range of benefits are offered including, 
but not limited to, private medical 
insurance, dental insurance, permanent 
health insurance, life assurance, personal 
accident insurance and annual holiday.

Executive Directors received benefits on the same basis as all 
other employees, at the prevailing rates and nothing else.

All staff members are eligible to 
participate in the SIP.

Executive Directors may participate in the SIP on the same 
basis as other employees.

All staff are entitled to join the Group 
Personal Pension Scheme. This is a 
defined contribution plan to which the 
Group makes employer contributions 
and staff can choose to make additional 
personal contributions. 

All staff receive an employer pension 
contribution of 11% of salary.

Executive Directors received an employer pension contribution 
of 13.5% of salary from 1 June 2020 which can be paid into 
the Group Personal Pension Scheme or delivered as a cash 
allowance, aligned with that of the senior managers.

The Company aligned employer pension contributions for 
all staff, including Executive Directors, in April 2021 to 11%.

All staff participate in the Group Profit 
Share Scheme. 

Executive Directors are eligible to participate in the Group 
Profit Share Scheme.

Profit Share payments relate to the 
responsibilities of the role and the 
individual level of performance against 
objectives for the relevant period.

Staff members can take their Profit 
Share in cash or elect for up to a third 
in shares.

Senior managers are required to take 
one-third of their payment in shares 
subject to lock-up conditions of one to 
three years and in addition are offered 
the opportunity for up to a further third 
of the Profit Share to be paid in shares. 
The remaining amount is in cash.

The Remuneration Committee approves all payments to 
Executive Directors, which are based on individual 
performance against objectives for the relevant period.

Executive Directors are required to take one-third of their 
payment in shares subject to lock-up conditions of one to 
three years. In addition they are offered the opportunity for 
up to a further third of their Profit Share to be paid in shares. 
The remaining amount will be paid in cash.

Whilst the Profit Share pool is capped based on the 
profitability of the Group and range stated above, there is 
no individual maximum entitlement set within this limit.

Malus and clawback provisions apply to all awards. Further 
details are set out below.

The Committee has discretion in the treatment of leavers as 
set out below.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information74 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Remuneration report continued

Remuneration Policy continued 
Remuneration Policy: comparison table for Executive Directors and staff continued

Element, purpose  
and link to strategy

Current operation 
for employees

Policy for Executive Directors

Share Scheme 
The Share Scheme allows the 
Remuneration Committee to grant 
options over up to 2% of the market 
capitalisation of Record plc (being 
approximately 4 million shares) 
per annum.

All staff members are eligible to 
participate in the Share Scheme.

Executive Directors are eligible to participate in the Share 
Scheme.

Any share option grants are awarded by 
management on a discretionary basis.

The Remuneration Committee limits the value of shares over 
which an option is granted to any Director in any year to a 
maximum of 200% of that Director’s salary for that year.

All share options awarded to Executive Directors are granted 
with an exercise price equal to the market value of the shares 
on the date of grant and are subject to a performance 
condition based on Record’s cumulative annual EPS growth 
with vesting on a stepped basis after three, four and five 
years. Awards that vest on the third and fourth year are 
required to be held until the fifth year.

Malus and clawback provisions apply to all awards. 
Further details are set out below.

The Committee has discretion in the treatment of leavers 
as set out below.

Executive Directors are not eligible to participate in the 
JSOP scheme.

Joint Share Ownership Plan 
(“JSOP”)
The JSOP has been introduced to 
accelerate the acquisition of shares for 
the next generation of management, 
as part of succession plans.

A financial commitment is required to 
participate, further aligning the 
participant’s contribution and retention 
with longer-term business performance 
and shareholder value.

Purchased shares are jointly held by the 
EBT and the employee under the JSOP 
agreement. The hurdle is struck at 
market price and the employee owns 
any value above the hurdle.

Vesting is over a four-year period, one 
quarter each year, and any gain in share 
price is realised in shares with a two-year 
holding period. 

There are clawback provisions and an 
employee is required to pay to participate 
in the scheme. 

All staff members are eligible to 
participate in the JSOP.

Any JSOP grants are awarded by 
management on a discretionary basis.

Remuneration policy for the Chairman and the Non-executive Directors
The table below sets out the remuneration policy for the Chairman and the Non-executive Directors. In summary, they only receive fixed 
pay and benefits.

Element, purpose  
and link to strategy

Current operation for Chairman 
and Non-executive Directors

Further information

Fees/salary 
Fixed remuneration that reflects the role, 
skills and experience.

Benefits 
To enable the Chairman and 
Non-executive Directors to carry out 
their roles.

The Chairman’s salary is determined by 
the Remuneration Committee.

The Non-executive Directors’ fees are 
approved by the Board.

Increases are normally expected to be in 
line with the typical level of increase 
awarded across the Group.

The Chairman receives benefits on the 
same basis as other Executive Directors, 
including pension, private medical 
insurance, dental insurance, permanent 
health insurance, life assurance, personal 
accident insurance and annual holiday.

Commission, SIP, Group Profit 
Share Scheme, Share Scheme 
and JSOP

The Chairman and the Non-executive 
Directors do not participate in any of 
these schemes.

Salaries and fees are reviewed annually. Any review will take 
into account market rates, business performance and 
individual contribution.

The Non-executive Directors receive expenses but do not 
receive any additional benefits.

Governance  

75

Service contracts and loss 
of office payment policy
We provide all Executive Directors with 
service agreements. None of the service 
agreements are for a fixed term and all 
include provisions for termination on six 
months’ notice by either party. Service 
agreements do not contain any contractual 
entitlement to receive bonuses, nor to 
participate in the Group Profit Share 
Scheme or the Group Share Scheme, nor 
to receive any fixed provision for termination 
compensation.

Non-executive Directors are appointed for 
an initial three-year period and are required 
to provide at least six months’ notice of 
their intention to resign. Their continued 
engagement is subject to annual re-election 
by shareholders at the Company’s AGM. 

The terms and conditions of appointment of 
the Executive Directors and Non-executive 
Directors are available for inspection at the 
Company’s registered office.

When an Executive Director leaves the 
Group, the Remuneration Committee will 
review the circumstances and apply the 
appropriate treatment to their final 
remuneration. Any payments that are made 
will be in line with contractual entitlements 
and statutory requirements only. Where 
applicable, the broad aim in making 
termination payments is to avoid rewarding 
poor performance.

Salary and benefits will continue to be paid 
throughout the notice period although the 
Committee has the discretion to make a 
payment in lieu of notice.

The treatment of payments for the 
Group Profit Share Scheme and the 
Share Scheme will be in accordance with 
the relevant scheme rules and discretion 
as set out in those plans at the time the 
Director leaves.

Engaging with employees and 
shareholders, decision-making 
processes and general employee 
pay and conditions
The Group’s approach to engaging with 
employees and shareholders are detailed in 
the Chair of the Remuneration Committee’s 
statement. The Group’s remuneration 
decision-making processes are also 
summarised in that statement and detailed 
further above in the Remuneration Policy 
tables, as well as the general approach to 
employee pay and conditions.

Malus and clawback
Clawback provisions enable variable 
remuneration to be reclaimed under 
exceptional circumstances, as follows:

•  GPS – malus and clawback provisions 
are in place in the event of adverse 
restatement of accounts or material 
misconduct, at the discretion of the 
Remuneration Committee. 

•  Share options – clawback provisions are 
in place for all options should there be 
any restatement of accounts or breach 
of contract, at the discretion of the 
Remuneration Committee.

•  Commission – clawback provisions are 

in place in the event of adverse 
restatement of accounts or breach of 
contract for all commission payments.

•  JSOP – clawback provisions are in place 

for conduct resulting in significant 
financial losses to the Company, material 
wrongdoing, conduct that brings the 
Company into material disrepute, breach 
of contract or breach of regulatory rules.

Source and funding of shares
Share awards under the Group Profit Share 
Scheme are covered wherever possible 
through market purchases by the 
Company’s Employee Benefit Trust (“EBT”) 
rather than through the issue of new 
shares, and this has been the case since 
the inception of the Scheme in 2007. 
It remains our intention to continue to 
operate in this manner in order to minimise 
potential dilution of shareholders’ interests. 
Similarly, options under the Share Scheme 
are not normally satisfied by the issue of 
new shares, in order to minimise potential 
dilution. The Company provides funds to 
the EBT to allow it to purchase shares in 
the market with which to satisfy the 
exercise of options. The number of shares 
purchased by the Group to hedge the 
award of options is based on an 
appropriate hedge ratio at each grant 
date, as calculated by management and 
approved by the Remuneration Committee.

Implementation of  
Remuneration Policy
The Group has implemented the 
Remuneration Policy, as approved by 
shareholders last year. The Group will 
continue to apply the Remuneration Policy 
in FY-22, with no changes being made. 

The Remuneration Committee will approve 
any variable remuneration payments for the 
CEO and CFO based on their performance 
against their objectives and in accordance 
with the Group Profit Share Scheme rules. 

Approach to remuneration for 
new Executive Directors
On the recruitment of a new Executive 
Director the level of fixed remuneration will 
be appropriate to the candidate’s skills and 
experience and the responsibility that they 
will be undertaking. New Executive 
Directors would be eligible to join the Group 
Profit Share Scheme and would be eligible 
to be considered for the Share Scheme as 
deemed appropriate by the Remuneration 
Committee, subject to the applicable policy 
at the time.

The Remuneration Committee recognises 
that a new Executive Director may forfeit 
remuneration as a result of leaving a 
previous employer and the Committee will 
consider mitigating that loss or part of that 
loss by making an award in addition to the 
remuneration outlined above. The 
Committee will consider any relevant 
factors including any performance 
conditions attached to any previous 
incentive arrangements and the likelihood 
of these conditions being met and will take 
reasonable steps to ensure that any 
payment is at an appropriate level.

When recruiting a new Non-executive 
Director, fees will be in line with the 
prevailing fee schedule paid to other Board 
members and Non-executive Directors at 
that time.

Executive shareholding policy
Any new Executive Director will be 
encouraged to build a shareholding of at 
least 1.5 times base salary, for example 
through the use of GPS and share option 
schemes, within a reasonable time of being 
appointed.

At the end of his/her appointment, an 
Executive Director would need to retain a 
shareholding previously built up through the 
use of remuneration schemes, but 
excluding any shares bought for cash, of a 
total of 1.5 times base salary, with half this 
total being held for a period of one year and 
half of this total being held for a period of 
two years.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information76 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Remuneration report continued

Remuneration Policy 
continued 
Regulation
We continue to review our Remuneration 
Policy in line with regulatory changes and 
good practice and to ensure compliance with 
the principles of the Remuneration Code of 
the UK financial services regulator, as 
applicable to the Group. In particular we will 
be reviewing the impact of the Investment 
Firm Prudential Regulation and any 
implications for our Remuneration Policy.

Leslie Hill

Remuneration Policy – illustrations
The charts below show the lowest, highest 
and average remuneration for the Executive 
Directors over the past three years. 
Fixed remuneration is comprised of salary, 
pension contributions, other benefits and 
any cash alternative. Variable remuneration 
comprises Group Profit Share, including 
cash and share payments, as well as any 
gains on share options.

As variable remuneration is not capped at 
the individual level, we have used the 
three-year average, highest and lowest 
remuneration as an indication of the 
Executive Director’s earnings potential. 
Future remuneration will be determined 
based on profitability and performance 
as described in the Remuneration Policy.

Minimum

100%

£723,825

3-year
low

3-year
high

3-year
average

48%

52%

£690,137

41%

59%

£1,270,178

45%

55%

£901,070

£

0

200k

400k

600k

800k

1,000k

1,200k

1,400k

Bob Noyen (left the Board on 4 February 2021)

3-year
low

3-year
high

3-year
average

69%

31%

£404,857 

48%

52%

£689,458

53%

47%

£589,812

£

0

200k

400k

600k

800k

1,000k

1,200k

1,400k

Steve Cullen

Minimum

100%

£152,640

3-year
low

3-year
high

3-year
average

70%

30%

£214,527

62%

38%

£245,090

65%

35%

£233,020

Key:

 Fixed

 Variable

£

0

200k

400k

600k

800k

1,000k

1,200k

1,400k

The above charts exclude the value 
of options granted to Directors.

Governance  

77

Annual report on remuneration
This part of the report has been prepared in accordance with Schedule 8 of the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups 
(Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 (as amended), and relevant sections of the Listing Rules. The annual report on remuneration 
will be put to an advisory shareholder vote at the 2021 AGM. The information on pages 77 to 84 has been audited, where required, under 
the regulations and is indicated as audited information where applicable.

Directors’ remuneration as a single figure (audited information)
The remuneration of the Directors for the year ended 31 March 2021 is detailed below together with their remuneration for the 
previous year.

Leslie Hill 
(appointed CEO on  
13 February 2020) 

James Wood-Collins 
(resigned as CEO 
on 13 February 2020) 

Bob Noyen 
(left the Board on  
4 February 2021) 

Steve Cullen

Executive 
Directors 

2021 
£ 

2020 
£ 

Salaries and fees 

450,000 

306,529 

Benefits¹  

Pensions2 

2,325 

2,150 

62,250 

47,512 

Total fixed pay 

514,575 

356,191 

2021 
£ 

— 

— 

— 

— 

2020 
£ 

2021 
£ 

2020 
£ 

2021 
£ 

2020 
£

249,096 

242,830 

285,913 

129,997 

129,997

809 

1,243 

1,393 

1,128 

38,610 

33,592 

44,316 

17,983 

1,908

20,150

288,515 

277,665 

331,622 

149,108 

152,055

Short-term incentive  
(GPS cash)4 

Short-term incentive  
(GPS shares)3  

427,420 

257,801 

— 

194,669 

84,795 

228,999 

43,612 

58,260

328,183 

128,902 

Total variable pay5 

755,603 

386,703 

Total 

1,270,178 

742,894 

— 

— 

— 

97,336 

42,397 

114,501 

292,005 

127,192 

343,500 

21,807 

65,419 

29,129

87,389

580,520 

404,857 

675,122 

214,527 

239,444

Neil Record 

Jane Tufnell 

Rosemary Hilary 

Tim Edwards

Non-executive  
Directors 

2021 
£ 

2020 
£ 

2021 
£ 

2020 
£ 

2021 
£ 

2020 
£ 

2021 
£ 

2020 
£

Salaries and fees 

79,310 

79,310 

63,500 

63,500 

49,862 

49,862 

43,497 

43,497

Benefits1 

Pensions2 

Total 

2,561 

10,971 

92,842 

2,490 

12,293 

94,093 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

182 

— 

161 

— 

—

—

63,500 

63,500 

49,862 

50,044 

43,658 

43,497

1.  This value includes matching shares on SIP scheme, medical benefits, payments made in lieu of medical benefits, overtime payments and reimbursement 

of taxable travel expenses.

2.  This includes payments made in lieu of pension contributions. Pension contributions were decreased from 15.5% to 13.5% on 1 June 2020. 
3.  Short-term incentive payments are subject to individual performance conditions summarised in the objectives table below. The shares vest immediately but 

are subject to lock-up restrictions and are calculated based on the overall profitability of the Group.

4.  The Remuneration Committee exercised discretion and James Wood-Collins was determined to be a good leaver for the GPS and his GPS relates to the 

period to 13 August 2020.

5.  The table excludes any value derived from share options. No Directors had a gain in the year. The only Director who had a gain in the prior year was 

James Wood-Collins (£2,100).

Payments for loss of office and payments made to former Directors
Bob Noyen left the Board of Directors on 4 February 2021 and left employment on 31 March 2021. Payments from 5 February to 
31 March were £80,423. These payments comprise £43,083 salary, £221 medical benefits, £20,773 short-term incentives (GPS cash), 
£10,386 short-term incentives (GPS shares) and £5,960 cash in lieu of pension. He was made a payment in lieu of notice of £142,956 
being six months’ salary and no other payments were made for loss of office. Bob was treated as a good leaver under the Group Profit 
Share Scheme and Share Scheme rules and Remuneration Policy. To assist with the transition and maintenance of client relationships, 
Bob agreed to provide consultancy support to the Company over a twelve-month period, commencing on 1 April 2021. 

James Wood-Collins left the Board of Directors on 13 February 2020 and left the Group on 13 August 2020 after working his six-month 
notice period. Payments from 1 April to 13 August were £287,804. These payments comprise £121,507 salary, £343 medical benefits, 
£68,954 short-term incentives (GPS cash) and £97,000 (statutory legal cap) for loss of office. No other payments were made to 
former Directors.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
78 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Remuneration report continued

Annual report on remuneration continued
Pensions (audited information)
Executive Directors are entitled to join the Group Personal Pension Scheme. This is a defined contribution plan and for the financial year 
ending 31 March 2021, the Group made contributions of 15.5% of each Director’s salary for April and May 2020, which was then 
reduced to 13.5% on 1 June 2020, that could either be paid into the Group Personal Pension Scheme, taken as cash or a combination 
of the two. 

All Directors who make personal contributions into the Company pension scheme via salary sacrifice receive an amount equivalent to the 
employer’s national insurance saved by the Company into their pension as an additional contribution.

The employer pension contributions for the financial years ending 31 March 2020 and 31 March 2021 are detailed in the tables on  
page 77.

Allocation of the Profit Share pool to Executive Directors
The Remuneration Committee is able to exercise discretion over the level of base Group Profit Share units that are awarded to Executive 
Directors based on the role and level of responsibility. The final allocation is adjusted based on an assessment of the individual Director’s 
performance compared to their objectives. On two occasions during the year, the Committee approved awards to the Directors after 
considering the role and performance of each individual Director for the relevant six-month period. The overall performance for the year 
for each Executive Director is summarised below. The Committee also receives reports from the Head of Compliance and Risk, regarding 
any legal or compliance issues relevant to the award.

Leslie Hill

Objectives

Outcomes

Strategic
Sales
Support our sales environment to enhance the sales of both our traditional 
products and new strategies. Deliver an EM Sustainable Finance Fund 
and build strategic partnerships.

Investments
Diversify our investment product offering, restructure the department to 
focus on risk management and active strategies separately.

Technology
Modernise our IT platform. 
Provide long-term flexibility and cost savings.

Highest ever AUME at $80.1 billion. Client numbers grew by 24%. 
EM Sustainable Finance Fund to launch. 

Product diversification being achieved through our own strategies and 
two new flagship product offerings in collaboration with external partners. 
Investment team was reorganised, with a change of our CIO and 
investment management teams.

Good progress in technology, with the introduction of a new data 
capture transformation platform to bring efficiencies and improve our 
client offering together with new development tools and improvements 
to the technology infrastructure.

Succession and organisational structure
Develop an organisational structure that is fit to deliver profitable growth 
and to support succession.

We have seen encouraging work in progress, with the creation of a new 
sales leadership team and a new investment leadership team.

Operational
People
Recruit, develop and retain high-performing colleagues as part of 
Record plc leadership and participation.

Press and investors
Build positive relationships with investors, brokers, city contacts 
and press.

This was achieved through the development and retention of 
high performers in the team.

This was achieved and the Company enjoyed share price growth from 
28 pence to 70 pence during the year.

Award: 
200%. Objectives were exceeded and the Committee made an award of 200% to recognise over-performance.

Governance  

79

Bob Noyen

Objectives

Outcomes

Strategic
Investment strategies
Manage investment products and services for the risk management 
investment team. Transition return product responsibilities and evolve 
investment management structure.

Client relationships
Initiate investment research to retain clients by introducing new services 
and/or improvements to existing services. Support client retention.

Operational
People 
Support to the CEO and the client and client services teams. Train and 
mentor colleagues as part of succession planning.

Investment performance has been variable with a reduction in 
performance fees in the year. New investment leadership team has 
been established.

For the clients that Bob was solely or jointly responsible for there was 
a strong retention rate and strong client servicing.

This was partially met during the period. Bob provided advice and 
support to the next generation of investment managers.

Compliance
Lead by example in ensuring compliance with policies and procedures, 
to ensure Record meets its obligations to clients and to regulators.

This has been met.

Award: 
Objectives were partially met for the period and the Committee made an award of 65% of base units, recognising some underperformance.

Steve Cullen

Objectives

Strategic 
Identify and implement opportunities for Finance team to become more 
commercial. 

Operational
Cost discipline and accounting

Ensure maintenance of cost discipline across the business through 
adherence to approved budget, and expenditure authorisation policy 
and procedures.

Risk management
Ensure suitable systems and controls in place within Finance to 
minimise potential errors/breaches.

Reporting
Ensure timely delivery of key reporting metrics, including the 
Annual Report, internal audit relationship, investor relations.

Department
Ensure appropriate team structure and skills and review areas for 
improving efficiency.

External relationships
Continue to develop relationships with external auditors, internal 
auditors, company brokers and investor relations.

Outcomes

Good progress made with the implementation of a new accounting 
package and a new tax advisory firm appointed.

Cost discipline was maintained throughout the financial year. 

No material errors or breaches in routine reporting, confirmed by 
external audit.

Refreshed approach to the Annual Report and improvements 
made to the style of the report.

New team working well together, improved internal reporting and 
use of technology to automate some manual processes.

Good relationships established with internal and external auditors. 
Increased involvement with brokers and investor relations.

Award: 
100%. Objectives were met for the period and progress being made to use new systems and automation.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information80 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Remuneration report continued

Annual report on remuneration continued
Directors’ share options and share awards (audited information)
During the financial year ended 31 March 2021 no option awards were made to Executive Directors.

All of the Executive Directors have previously been awarded share options and the table below sets out details of Executive Directors’ 
outstanding share option awards, which may vest on a stepped basis over three, four and five years subject to continued service and 
performance conditions, as well as any options that have lapsed or been exercised.

Total  
options at 
1 April 
2020 

Options 
granted 
in period 

Date of grant 

Leslie Hill 

01/12/15 

150,000 

27/01/16 

33,334 

30/11/16 

366,667 

26/01/18 

280,000 

21/08/19 

575,000 

Bob Noyen1 

01/12/15 

150,000 

27/01/16 

33,334 

30/11/16 

366,667 

26/01/18 

280,000 

21/08/19 

575,000 

Steve Cullen 

01/12/15 

150,000 

27/01/16 

33,333 

30/11/16 

366,667 

26/01/18 

125,000 

21/08/19 

260,000 

1.  Resigned 4 February 2021.

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Options 
lapsed 
in period 

(150,000) 

(33,334) 

(183,333) 

(93,333) 

— 

(150,000) 

(33,334) 

(183,333) 

(93,333) 

— 

(150,000) 

(33,333) 

(183,333) 

(41,666) 

— 

Options 
exercised 
in period 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Total  
options at 
31 March 
2021 

— 

— 

Exercise 
price 

Earliest 
exercise 

Latest  

exercise

28.875p 

01/12/20 

30/11/21

24.50p 

27/01/20 

26/01/22

183,334 

34.0718p 

30/11/19 

29/11/22

186,667 

575,000 

— 

— 

43.50p 

26/01/21 

25/01/24

31.10p 

21/08/22 

20/08/25

28.875p 

01/12/20 

30/11/21

24.50p 

27/01/20 

26/01/22

183,334 

34.0718p 

30/11/19 

29/11/22

186,667 

575,000 

— 

— 

43.50p 

26/01/21 

25/01/24

31.10p 

21/08/22 

20/08/25

28.875p 

01/12/20 

30/11/21

24.50p 

27/01/20 

26/01/22

183,334 

34.0718p 

30/11/19 

29/11/22

83,334 

43.50p 

26/01/21 

25/01/24

260,000 

31.10p 

21/08/22 

20/08/25

The outstanding share options above vest subject to performance conditions which are detailed below.

There were no gains on share options by Directors in the year ended 31 March 2021.

Vesting of awards made to Executive Directors is on a stepped basis and is linked to Record’s average annualised EPS growth over the 
relevant period since grant as follows:

Record’s annualised EPS growth over the period from grant to vesting 

Percentage of shares subject to the award which vest

>RPI growth + 13% 

>RPI growth + 10%, =RPI growth + 7%, =RPI growth + 4%, = 3 months 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Total current assets 

Total assets 

Current liabilities 

Trade and other payables   

Corporation tax liabilities 

Lease liabilities 

Financial liabilities 

Derivative financial liabilities  

Total current liabilities 

Non-current liabilities 

Deferred tax liabilities 

Provisions 

Lease liabilities 

Total non-current liabilities 

Total net assets 

Equity 

Issued share capital 

Share premium account 

Capital redemption reserve  

Retained earnings 

Equity attributable to owners of the parent  

Non-controlling interests 

Total equity 

Approved by the Board on 16 June 2021 and signed on its behalf by:

Neil Record 
Chairman 

Steve Cullen
Chief Financial Officer

Company registered number: 1927640

The notes on pages 107 to 134 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

101

2020 
£’000

470

1,175

751

2,472

—

4,868

8,704

193

7,958

14,294

31,149

36,017

2021 
£’000 

420 

684 

683 

3,046 

 320 

5,153 

8,006 

260 

12,932 

6,847 

28,045 

33,198 

(3,426) 

(3,009)

(315) 

(539) 

(601)

(544)

(1,696) 

(2,191)

(16) 

(610)

(5,992) 

(6,955)

(108) 

(200) 

(99) 

(407) 

(86)

(200)

(615)

(901)

26,799 

28,161

50 

2,418 

26 

24,305 

26,799 

— 

50

2,259

26

25,694

28,029

132

26,799 

28,161

Note 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

18 

19 

19 

12 

20 

17 

15 

21 

12 

22 

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
102 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

Year ended 31 March 2021

Called-up 
share capital 
£’000 

Note 

Share 
premium 
account 
£’000 

Capital 
redemption 
reserve 
£’000 

Retained 
earnings 
£’000 

Equity 
attributable 
to equity  
holders of  
the parent 
£’000 

Non- 
controlling 
interests 
£’000 

Total 
equity 
£’000

As at 1 April 2020 

50 

2,259 

26 

25,694 

28,029 

132 

28,161

Profit and total comprehensive  
income for the year 

Trade Record sale 

Dividends paid 

Own shares acquired by EBT 

Release of shares held by EBT 

9 

Share-based payment reserve movement  

Transactions with shareholders 

As at 31 March 2021 

Year ended 31 March 2020

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

50 

Called-up 
share capital 
£’000 

Note 

As at 1 April 2019 

IFRS 16 opening adjustment 

Profit and total comprehensive  
income for the year 

Dividends paid 

9 

Issue of shares in subsidiary 

Own shares acquired by EBT 

Release of shares held by EBT 

Share-based payment reserve movement  

Transactions with shareholders 

As at 31 March 2020 

50 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

50 

— 

— 

— 

— 

159 

— 

159 

2,418 

Share 
premium 
account 
£’000 

2,243 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

16 

— 

16 

2,259 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

26 

5,351 

32 

(5,290) 

(2,338) 

994 

(138) 

5,351 

32 

(5,290) 

(2,338) 

1,153 

(138) 

(6,772) 

(6,613) 

24,305 

26,799 

— 

(132) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Capital 
redemption 
reserve 
£’000 

Retained 
earnings 
£’000 

Equity 
attributable 
to equity  
holders of  
the parent 
£’000 

Non- 
controlling 
interests 
£’000 

26 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

26 

25,022 

27,341 

(98) 

(98) 

6,420 

(5,888) 

— 

6,420 

(5,888) 

—  

(1,020) 

(1,020) 

971 

287 

987 

287 

(5,650) 

(5,634) 

25,694 

28,029 

60 

— 

(48) 

— 

120 

— 

— 

— 

120 

132 

The notes on pages 107 to 134 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

5,351

(100)

(5,290)

(2,338)

1,153

(138)

(6,613)

26,799

Total 
equity 
£’000

27,401

(98)

6,372

(5,888)

120

(1,020)

987

287

(5,514)

28,161

 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements  

Consolidated statement of cash flows

Year ended 31 March 2021

Profit after tax 

Adjustments for non-cash movements   

Depreciation of right-of-use assets  

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 

Amortisation of intangible assets 

Share-based payments 

(Increase) in other non-cash movements   

Finance income 

Finance expense 

Tax expense 

Changes in working capital 

Decrease/(increase) in receivables 

Increase in payables 

Cash inflow from operating activities  

Corporation tax paid 

Net cash inflow from operating activities 

Purchase of intangible software 

Purchase of property, plant and equipment 

Purchase of investments 

(Redemption)/subscription of units in funds 

Investment in subsidiaries   

(Purchase)/sale of money market instruments with maturity > 3 months   

Sale of Trade Record shares 

Interest received 

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from investing activities 

Cash flow from financing activities 

Lease repayments 

Subscription for shares in subsidiary 

Purchase of own shares 

Dividends paid to equity shareholders 

Cash outflow from financing activities   

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents in the year  

Exchange (losses) and gains 

Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the year 

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year 

Closing cash and cash equivalents consist of: 

Cash 

Cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents 

The notes on pages 107 to 134 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

103

2020 
£’000

6,372

 504

253

129

738

(786)

(146)

58

1,365

(1,281)

618

7,824

(1,399)

6,425

(311)

(243)

(1,113)

118

—

2021 
£’000 

5,351 

490 

298 

168 

486 

(492) 

(71) 

38 

802 

696 

417 

8,183 

(1,385) 

6,798 

(189) 

(230) 

(881) 

(335) 

(23) 

(4,973) 

2,777

120 

71 

—

160

(6,440) 

1,388

(560) 

— 

(1,808) 

(5,290) 

(7,658) 

(7,300) 

(147) 

14,294 

6,847 

2,372 

4,475 

6,847 

(576)

120

(487)

(5,888)

(6,831)

982

346

12,966

14,294

8,004

6,290

14,294

Note 

12 

13 

11 

7 

11 

13 

12 

9 

18 

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
104 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Company statement of financial position

As at 31 March 2021

Non-current assets 

Right-of-use assets 

Investments 

Deferred tax 

Total non-current assets   

Current assets 

Corporation tax 

Trade and other receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Total current assets 

Total assets 

Current liabilities 

Trade and other payables   

Corporation tax liabilities 

Lease liabilities 

Total current liabilities 

Non-current liabilities 

Lease liabilities 

Provisions 

Total non-current liabilities 

Total net assets 

Equity 

Issued share capital 

Share premium account 

Capital redemption reserve  

Retained earnings 

Total equity 

Note 

12 

14 

16 

18 

19 

19 

21 

22 

2021 
£’000 

642 

4,315 

7 

4,964 

17 

1,387 

173 

1,577 

6,541 

(16) 

— 

(501) 

(517) 

(96) 

(200) 

(296) 

2020 
£’000

1,096

3,516

—

4,612

—

142

2,241

2,383

6,995

(10)

(2)

(495)

(507)

(584)

(200)

(784)

5,728 

5,704

50 

1,809 

26 

3,843 

5,728 

50

1,809

26

3,819

5,704

The Company’s total comprehensive income for the year (which is principally derived from intra-group dividends) was £5,133,381 
(2020: £6,098,249).

Approved by the Board on 16 June 2021 and signed on its behalf by:

Neil Record 
Chairman 

Steve Cullen
Chief Financial Officer

Company registered number: 1927640

The notes on pages 107 to 134 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements  

105

Company statement of changes in equity

Year ended 31 March 2021

As at 1 April 2020 

Profit and total comprehensive income for the year 

Dividends paid 

Share option reserve movement 

Transactions with shareholders 

As at 31 March 2021 

Year ended 31 March 2020

As at 1 April 2019 

IFRS 16 opening adjustment 

Profit and total comprehensive income for the year 

Dividends paid 

Share option reserve movement 

Transactions with shareholders 

As at 31 March 2020 

Note 

9 

Note 

9 

Called-up 
share 
capital 
£’000 

50 

— 

— 

— 

— 

50 

Called-up 
share 
capital 
£’000 

50 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

50 

Share 
premium  
account 
£’000 

1,809 

— 

— 

— 

— 

1,809 

Share 
premium  
account 
£’000 

1,809 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

1,809 

Capital  
redemption 
reserve 
£’000 

26 

— 

— 

— 

— 

26 

Retained 
earnings 
£’000 

3,819 

5,133 

Total 
shareholders’ 
equity 
£’000

5,704

5,133

(5,290) 

(5,290)

181 

(5,109) 

3,843 

181

(5,109)

5,728

Capital  
redemption 
reserve 
£’000 

Retained 
earnings 
£’000 

Total 
shareholders’ 
equity 
£’000

26 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

26 

3,616 

(91) 

6,098 

(5,888) 

84 

(5,804) 

3,819 

5,501

(91)

6,098

(5,888)

84

(5,804)

5,704

The notes on pages 107 to 134 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
106 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Company statement of cash flows

Year ended 31 March 2021

Profit after tax 

Adjustments for non-cash movements   

Depreciation of right-of-use assets  

Loss on investments 

Other non-cash movements 

Finance income 

Finance expense 

Tax expense 

Changes in working capital 

(Increase) in receivables 

Increase in payables 

Cash (outflow)/inflow from operating activities  

Corporation taxes received/(paid) 

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from operating activities 

Cash flow from investing activities 

Dividends received 

Investment in subsidiaries   

Purchase of investments 

Redemption of seed funds  

Interest received 

Disposal of subsidiary 

Net cash (outflow) from investing activities 

Cash flow from financing activities 

Lease repayments 

Dividends paid to equity shareholders 

Cash (outflow) from financing activities  

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents in the year 

FX revaluation 

Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the year 

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year 

Closing cash and cash equivalents consist of: 

Cash 

Cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents 

The notes on pages 107 to 134 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

Note 

9 

18 

2021 
£’000 

(137) 

453 

167 

— 

— 

35 

(30) 

(1,245) 

6 

751 

4 

(747) 

2020 
£’000

68

453

25

(162)

(1)

54

5 

(271)

298

469

(17)

452

5,270 

6,030

(23) 

(881) 

— 

— 

120 

4,486 

(517) 

(5,290) 

(5,807) 

(2,068) 

— 

2,241 

173 

173 

— 

173 

(80)

—

2,247

2

—

8,199

(517)

(5,888)

(6,405)

2,246

(8)

3

2,241

2,241

—

2,241

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements  

107

Notes to the financial statements

For the year ended 31 March 2021

These financial statements exclude disclosures that are both immaterial and judged to be unnecessary to understand our results and financial position.

1. Accounting policies
In order to provide more clarity to the notes to the financial statements, accounting policy descriptions appear at the beginning of the note 
to which they relate, and are shown in blue text.

The principal accounting policies adopted in the preparation of these consolidated financial statements are set out in the notes below. 
These policies have been consistently applied to all periods presented unless otherwise stated.

a. Accounting convention
Basis of preparation
The Group financial statements have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs adopted pursuant to Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002 as it applies 
in the European Union and the Company financial statements have been prepared in accordance with international accounting standards in 
conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. The financial statements have been prepared on a historical cost basis, modified 
to include fair valuation of derivative financial instruments.

The Directors are satisfied that the Company and the Group have adequate resources with which to continue to operate for the foreseeable future. 
In arriving at this conclusion, the Directors have considered in detail the impact of the covid-19 pandemic on the Group, the market it operates in 
and its stakeholders. For this reason the financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis. Please refer to the Directors’ report 
on page 88 for more detail on going concern, and also see management’s detailed review of the impact of covid-19 on page 44. 

The preparation of financial statements in accordance with the recognition and measurement principles set out in IFRSs requires management to 
make judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect the application of policies and reported amounts of assets and liabilities, income and 
expenses. The bases for management judgements, estimates and assumptions are discussed further in note 2.

Future accounting developments
The Group did not implement the requirements of any other standards or interpretations that were in issue but were not required to be adopted 
by the Group at the year end date. No other standards or interpretations have been issued that are expected to have a material impact on the 
Group’s financial statements.

b. Basis of consolidation
The consolidated financial information contained within the financial statements incorporates financial statements of the Company and its 
subsidiaries drawn up to 31 March 2021. Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Company and are included from the date that control 
commences until the date that control ceases. Control is achieved where the Company is exposed to or has rights over variable returns from 
its involvement with the entity and it has the power to affect returns. 

An Employee Benefit Trust has been established for the purposes of satisfying certain share-based awards. As the Group has “de facto” 
control over this special purpose entity, the trust is fully consolidated within the financial statements.

At the end of the financial year, the Group held investments in two seed funds. These funds are held by Record plc and represent seed capital 
investments by the Group. 

Significant judgement 
The Group uses judgement to determine whether investments in its seed funds constitute controlling interests in accordance with IFRS 10 – 
“Consolidated Financial Statements”. The Group considers all relevant facts and circumstances in assessing whether it has control over specific 
funds or other entities. This includes consideration of the extent of the Group’s exposure to variability of returns as an investor and the Group’s 
ability to direct the relevant activities, through exercising its voting rights as an investor, or as investment manager. We consider that the Group 
exerts such control in cases where (either in isolation or together with its related parties) it holds a majority of units in the fund.

If the Group is in a position to be able to control a fund, then the fund is consolidated within the Group financial statements. Such funds are 
consolidated either on a line-by-line basis, or if the fund meets the definition of a disposal group held for sale it is classified and accounted for on 
that basis. In the case that the Group does not control a fund for the complete reporting period, then the fund is consolidated only for the part of 
the reporting period for which the Group has control over the entity.

Where the Group controls an entity, but does not own all the share capital of that entity, the interest of the other shareholders’ non-controlling interests is 
stated within equity at the non-controlling interests’ proportion of the fair value of the recognised assets and liabilities. In the case of the funds controlled 
by the Group, the interests of any external investors in such funds are recognised as a financial liability as investments in the fund are not considered to 
be equity instruments.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information108 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Notes to the financial statements continued

For the year ended 31 March 2021

1. Accounting policies continued
b. Basis of consolidation continued
The financial statements of subsidiary undertakings, which are prepared using uniform accounting policies, are coterminous with those of the Company 
apart from those of the seed funds which have accounting reference dates of 30 September. The consolidated financial statements incorporate the 
financial performance of the seed funds in the year ended 31 March 2021 and the financial position of the seed funds as at 31 March 2021.

The Company is taking advantage of the exemption under the Companies Act 2006 s408(1) not to present its individual statement of comprehensive 
income and related notes that form part of the financial statements. The Group’s total comprehensive income for the year includes a profit of £5,133,381 
attributable to the Company (2020: £6,098,249).

All intra-group transactions, balances, income, expenses and dividends are eliminated on consolidation.

c. Foreign currencies
The financial statements are presented in sterling (£), which is the functional currency of the parent company. Foreign currency transactions 
are translated into the functional currency of the parent company using prevailing exchange rates which are updated on a monthly basis. 
Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and from the remeasurement of monetary items 
at year-end exchange rates are recognised in the statement of comprehensive income under “other income or expense”.

d. Administrative expenses
Administrative expense includes staff costs, marketing and IT costs, which are recognised on an accruals basis as services are provided 
to the Group.

e. Financial instruments
Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised when the Group becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the financial instrument. 
Financial assets are derecognised when the contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial assets expire, or when the financial asset and 
all substantial risks and rewards are transferred. A financial liability is derecognised when it is extinguished, discharged, cancelled or expires.

f. Impairment of assets
The Group assesses whether there is any indication that any of its assets have been impaired at least annually. If such an indication exists, 
the asset’s recoverable amount is estimated and compared to its carrying value.

An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount. Impairment losses 
are recognised in profit or loss.

g. Provisions and contingent liabilities
Provisions are recognised when present obligations as a result of a past event will probably lead to an outflow of economic resources from 
the Group and amounts can be estimated reliably. Timing or amount of the outflow may still be uncertain. A present obligation arises from the 
presence of a legal or constructive commitment that has resulted from past events.

Provisions are measured at the estimated expenditure required to settle the present obligation, based on the most reliable evidence available at 
the reporting date, including the risks and uncertainties associated with the present obligation. Provisions are discounted to their present values, 
where the time value of money is material. Any reimbursement that the Group can be virtually certain to collect from a third party with respect to 
the obligation is recognised as a separate asset. However, this asset may not exceed the amount of the related provision.

All provisions are reviewed at each reporting date and adjusted to reflect the current best estimate. In those cases where the possible outflow 
of economic resources as a result of present obligations is considered improbable or remote, no liability is recognised.

h. Equity
Share capital represents the nominal (par) value of shares that have been issued. Share premium includes any premium received on issue of 
share capital. From time to time, the Group has bought in ordinary shares for cancellation. The cost of the buy-ins was taken directly to retained 
earnings. The nominal value of the shares was taken to a capital redemption reserve. Retained earnings includes all current and prior period 
retained profits and share-based employee remuneration. All transactions with owners of the parent are recorded separately within equity.

2. Critical accounting estimates and judgements
In order to prepare the financial statements in accordance with IFRS, management make certain critical accounting estimates. Management are 
also required to exercise judgement in the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies and in determining the reported amount of certain 
assets and liabilities.

The estimates and associated assumptions are based on historical experience and various other factors including expectations of future events 
that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which form the basis of making the judgements about carrying values 
of assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. As a consequence, actual results may differ from these estimates. 
The estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period 
in which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period, or in the period of the revision and future periods if the revision affects 
both current and future periods. 

Financial statements  

109

Areas of significant judgement – consolidation of seed funds
Note 1b describes the basis which the Group uses to determine whether it controls seed funds; further detail on consolidation of seed funds 
is provided in note 14.

Sources of estimation uncertainty
Management recognise that the use of estimates is important in calculating both the fair value of share options offered by the Group to its 
employees (see note 23) and deferred tax (see note 15), however the sources of estimation uncertainty do not present a significant risk of material 
adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets or liabilities within the next financial year in either case.

Calculation of leased assets and liabilities requires the use of both estimation and judgement. The identification of an appropriate discount rate 
to use in the calculation of the lease liability involves both estimation and judgement. Where the lease’s implicit rate is not readily determinable, 
an incremental borrowing rate must be calculated by the Group. The discount rate used has a direct effect on the size of the lease liability 
capitalised and although this has been included as an area where the use of estimation and judgement in note 12 is important, it is unlikely 
to materially impact the Group. Intangible assets are written down in accordance with the Group’s amortisation policy on page 112. The assets 
are reviewed by management to ensure the amortisation period is appropriate. Investments are revalued at market value monthly and any 
potential impairments would be written down as and when the Company is notified.

3. Segmental analysis
The Directors, who together are the entity’s Chief Operating Decision Maker, consider that its services comprise one operating segment (being the 
provision of currency management services) and that it operates in a market that is not bound by geographical constraints. The Group provides 
Directors with revenue information disaggregated by product, whilst operating costs, assets and liabilities are presented on an aggregated basis. 
This reflects the unified basis on which the products are marketed, delivered and supported. Further information on the Group’s operations and 
principal activities is provided in the Business model section from page 8. Revenue analysed by product is provided in note 4.

4. Revenue
Revenue recognition
Revenue comprises the fair value of the consideration received or receivable for the provision of currency management services. Our revenues 
typically arise from charging management fees, performance fees and other currency services income and are accounted for in accordance with 
IFRS 15 – “Revenue from contracts with customers”. 

Management fees and other currency services income are recorded on a monthly basis as the service occurs; there are no other performance 
obligations (excluding standard duty of care requirements). Management fees are calculated as an agreed percentage of the Assets Under 
Management Equivalents (“AUME”) denominated in the client’s chosen base currency. The percentage varies depending on the nature of services 
and the level of AUME. Management fees are typically invoiced to the customer quarterly with receivables recognised for unpaid invoices.

The Group is entitled to earn performance fees from some clients where the performance of the clients’ mandates exceeds defined benchmarks 
over a set time period, and are recognised when the fee amount can be estimated reliably and it is highly probable that it will not be subject to 
significant reversal.

Performance fee revenues are not considered to be highly probable until the end of a contractual performance period and therefore are not 
recognised until they crystallise, at which time they are payable by the client and cannot be clawed back. There are no other performance 
obligations or services provided which suggest these have been earned either before or after crystallisation date.

a. Revenue from contracts with customers
The following table provides a breakdown of revenue from contracts with customers, with management fees analysed by product. Other currency 
services income includes fees from signal hedging and fiduciary execution.

Revenue by product type 

Management fees 

Passive Hedging 

Dynamic Hedging 

Currency for Return 

Multi-product 

Total management fee income 

Performance fee income 

Other currency services income 

Total revenue from contracts with customers 

2021 
£’000 

2020 
£’000

11,377 

12,026

5,623 

2,005 

5,873 

3,995

1,982

5,130

24,878 

23,133

81 

453 

1,819

611

25,412 

25,563

Management fees are invoiced typically on a quarterly basis, although Record may invoice fees monthly for some of its larger clients. 
Performance fees can be invoiced on a quarterly, six-monthly or annually basis, as agreed with our clients.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
110 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Notes to the financial statements continued

For the year ended 31 March 2021

4. Revenue continued
Revenue recognition continued
b. Geographical analysis
The geographical analysis of revenue is based on the destination i.e. the location of the client to whom the services are provided. All turnover 
originated in the UK. Other relates to a number of regions that are individually immaterial.

Revenue by geographical region 

Management and performance fee income 

UK 

US 

Switzerland 

Other 

Total revenue 

2021 
£’000 

2020 
£’000

2,322 

8,619 

9,097 

5,374 

25,412 

2,328

6,209

11,377

5,649

25,563

c. Major clients
During the year ended 31 March 2021, two clients individually accounted for more than 10% of the Group’s revenue. The two largest clients 
generated revenues of £4.1 million and £2.7 million in the year (2020: three largest clients generated revenues of £3.9 million, £3.5 million and 
£3.1 million in the year).

5. Operating profit
Operating profit for the year is stated after charging/(crediting):

Staff costs 

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 

Depreciation of leased property 

Amortisation of intangibles  

Auditor fees: 

Fees payable to the Group’s auditor for the audit of the Company’s annual accounts 

Fees payable to the Group’s auditor for the audit of subsidiary undertakings 

Fees payable to the Group’s auditor for the audit of consolidated funds 

Auditor fees total 

Fees payable to the Group’s auditor and its associates for other services: 

Audit-related assurance services required by law or regulation 

Other non-audit services 

(Profit)/loss on forward FX contracts held to hedge cash flow 

Loss on derivative financial instruments held by seed funds 

Exchange losses/(gains) on revaluation of external holding in seed funds  

Other exchange losses/(gains) 

Investment (gains) 

6. Staff costs
The average number of employees, including Directors, employed by the Group during the year was:

Corporate 

Client relationships 

Investment research 

Operations 

Risk management 

Support 

Annual average 

2021 
£’000 

2020 
£’000

13,470 

12,087

299 

490 

168 

70 

80 

— 

150 

5 

12 

(673) 

53 

97 

652 

(170) 

253

504

129

64

53

43

160

7

26

509

323

(115)

(515)

(283)

2021 

2020

7 

17 

16 

23 

5 

15 

83 

8

16

16

24

5

13

82

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements  

111

The aggregate costs of the above employees, including Directors, were as follows:

Wages and salaries 

Social security costs 

Pension costs 

Other employment benefit costs 

Aggregate staff costs 

2021 
£’000 

10,542 

1,349 

574 

1,005 

2020 
£’000

9,356

1,278

514

939

13,470 

12,087

Other employment benefit costs include share-based payments, share option costs, and costs relating to the Record plc Share Incentive Plan. 
Details of payments made to Directors for loss of office are provided on page 77.

7. Taxation – Group
Current tax is the tax currently payable based on taxable profit for the year. Current income tax assets and/or liabilities comprise those obligations 
to, or claims from, fiscal authorities relating to the current or prior reporting periods that are unpaid at the reporting date. Current tax is payable on 
taxable profit, which differs from profit or loss in the financial statements. Calculation of current tax is based on tax rates and tax laws that have 
been enacted or substantively enacted by the end of the reporting period.

UK current year charge 

Overseas taxes 

Prior year adjustments 

Current tax charge 

Origination and reversal of temporary differences 

Total deferred tax 

Tax on profit on ordinary activities 

The total charge for the year can be reconciled to the accounting profit as follows:

Profit before taxation 

Taxation at the standard rate of tax in the UK of 19% (2020: 19%) 

Tax effects of: 

Other disallowable expenses and non-taxable income 

Higher tax rates on subsidiary undertakings 

Adjustments recognised in current year in relation to Research and Development claims in respect of prior years 

Other temporary differences 

Total tax expense 

The tax expense comprises: 

Current tax expense 

Deferred tax (income)/expense 

Total tax expense 

2021 
£’000 

1,144 

64 

(108) 

1,100 

(298) 

(298) 

802 

2021 
£’000 

6,153 

1,169 

— 

19 

(108) 

(278) 

802 

1,100 

(298) 

802 

2020 
£’000

1,402

50

(143) 

1,309 

56

 56 

1,365

2020 
£’000

7,737

1,470

4

17

(143)

17

1,365

1,309

56

1,365

The standard rate of UK corporation tax for the year is 19% (2020: 19%). A full corporation tax computation is prepared at the year end. The actual 
charge as a percentage of the profit before tax may differ from the underlying tax rate. Differences typically arise as a result of capital allowances 
differing from depreciation charged, and certain types of expenditure not being deductible for tax purposes. Other differences may also arise.

The tax charge for the year ended 31 March 2021 was 13.0% of profit before tax (2020: 17.6%). Other temporary differences for the year ended 
31 March 2021 include the impact of deferred tax income of £298k (2020: expense of £56k).

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
112 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Notes to the financial statements continued

For the year ended 31 March 2021

8. Earnings per share
Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit for the financial year attributable to equity holders of the parent by the weighted 
average number of ordinary shares in issue during the year.

Diluted earnings per share is calculated as for the basic earnings per share with a further adjustment to the weighted average number of ordinary 
shares to reflect the effects of all potential dilution.

There is no difference between the profit for the financial year attributable to equity holders of the parent used in the basic and diluted earnings 
per share calculations.

Weighted average number of shares used in calculation of basic earnings per share 

Effect of potential dilutive ordinary shares – share options  

Weighted average number of shares used in calculation of diluted earnings per share 

Basic earnings per share 

Diluted earnings per share   

2021 

2020

  194,461,787  196,679,874

1,705,089 

390,156

  196,166,876  197,070,030

pence 

2.75 

2.73 

pence

3.26

3.26

The potential dilutive shares relate to the share options granted in respect of the Group’s Share Scheme (see note 23). There were share options 
in place at the beginning of the year over 11,895,515 shares. During the year 1,385,263 share options were exercised, and a further 2,515,831 
share options lapsed or were forfeited. The Group granted 3,850,000 share options with a potentially dilutive effect during the year. 
Of the 11,844,421 share options in place at the end of the period, 9,391,908 have a dilutive impact at the year end.

9. Dividends
Interim and special dividends are recognised when paid and final dividends when approved by shareholders.

The dividends paid by the Group during the year ended 31 March 2021 totalled £5,290,324 (2.71 pence per share) which comprised a final dividend 
in respect of the year ended 31 March 2020 of £2,261,779 (1.15 pence per share), a special dividend in respect of the year ended 31 March 2020 
of £806,374 (0.41 pence per share) and an interim dividend for the year ended 31 March 2021 of £2,222,171 (1.15 pence per share).

The dividends paid by the Group during the year ended 31 March 2020 totalled £5,887,541 (2.99 pence per share) which comprised a final dividend 
in respect of the year ended 31 March 2019 of £2,261,970 (1.15 pence per share), a special dividend in respect of the year ended 31 March 2019 
of £1,357,182 (0.69 pence per share) and an interim dividend for the year ended 31 March 2020 of £2,268,389 (1.15 pence per share).

For the year ended 31 March 2021, a final ordinary dividend of 1.15 pence per share has been proposed and a special dividend of 0.45 pence 
per share has been declared, totalling £2.3 million and £0.8 million respectively.

10. Retirement benefit obligations
The Group operates defined contribution pension plans for the benefit of employees. The Group makes contributions to independently 
administered plans, such contributions being recognised as an expense when they fall due. The assets of the schemes are held separately from 
those of the Group in independently administered funds.

The Group is not exposed to the particular risks associated with the operation of defined benefit plans and has no legal or constructive obligation 
to make any further payments to the plans other than the contributions due.

The pension cost charge disclosed in note 6 to the accounts represents contributions payable by the Group to the funds.

11. Intangible assets
Intangible assets are shown at historical cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment losses. Amortisation is charged to profit or loss on a 
straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives of the intangible assets unless such lives are indefinite. Amortisation is included within operating 
expenses in the statement of comprehensive income. Intangible assets are amortised from the date they are available for use. Useful lives are as 
follows:

•  Software – 2 to 5 years

Amortisation periods and methods are reviewed annually and adjusted if appropriate.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements  

113

The Group’s intangible assets comprise both purchased software and the capitalised cost of software deployment. No internal costs of software 
development are capitalised. Internal software costs would be capitalised if they meet the IAS 38 criteria. The carrying amounts can be analysed 
as follows:

2021 

Cost 

At 1 April 2020 

Additions 

Disposals 

At 31 March 2021 

Amortisation 

At 1 April 2020 

Charge for the year 

Disposals 

At 31 March 2021 

Net book amounts 

At 31 March 2021 

At 1 April 2020 

2020 

Cost 

At 1 April 2019 

Additions 

Disposals 

At 31 March 2020 

Amortisation 

At 1 April 2019 

Charge for the year 

Disposals 

At 31 March 2020 

Net book amounts 

At 31 March 2020 

At 1 April 2019 

Software 
£’000 

Total 
£’000

1,903 

1,903

189 

(951) 

189

(951)

1,141 

1,141

1,433 

1,433

168 

(880) 

721 

420 

470 

Software 
£’000 

168

(880)

721

420

470

Total 
£’000

1,592 

1,592

311 

— 

311

—

1,903 

1,903

1,304 

1,304

129 

— 

129

—

1,433 

1,433

470 

288 

470

288

Disposals represent £880,329 of fully depreciated assets that were not in use on 31 March 2021 and £71,377 of Trade Record assets which 
were removed from the consolidation as the result of the Group divesting from Trade Record on 21 December 2020. The annual contractual 
commitment for the maintenance and support of the above software is £221,004 (2020: £187,454). All amortisation charges are included 
within administrative expenses.

12. Leases 
The Group’s lease arrangements consist of business premises property leases. Rental contracts are typically made for fixed periods of three to 
six years but they may have extension options. Lease terms are negotiated on an individual basis and contain a wide range of different terms and 
conditions. The lease agreements do not impose any covenants, but leased assets cannot be used as security for borrowing purposes.

Leases have been recognised as a right-of-use asset and a corresponding liability at the date at which the leased asset is available for use by the 
Group. Each lease payment is allocated between the liability and finance cost. The finance cost is charged to profit or loss over the lease period 
so as to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability for each period. The right-of-use asset is depreciated 
over the shorter of the asset’s useful life and the lease term on a straight-line basis.

Assets and liabilities arising from a lease are initially measured on a present value basis. Right-of-use assets include the net present value of the 
lease payments less any lease incentives receivable.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
114 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Notes to the financial statements continued

For the year ended 31 March 2021

12. Leases continued
The lease payments are discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease. If that rate cannot be determined, the Group’s incremental borrowing rate is 
used, being the rate that the Group would have to pay to borrow the funds necessary to obtain an asset of similar value in a similar economic environment 
with similar terms and conditions. As the Group has no borrowings it has estimated the incremental borrowing rate based on interest rate data available in 
the market, adjusted to reflect Record’s creditworthiness, the leased asset in question and the terms and conditions of the lease. For those leases which 
existed prior to the IFRS 16 transition date on 1 April 2019, a discount rate of 4% was used in calculating the lease liability on transition.

The leases relevant to the twelve months ended 31 March 2021, and the comparative period, are as described below.

On 7 September 2016, the Group signed a new lease on premises at Second and Third Floors, Morgan House, Madeira Walk, Windsor, 
at an annual commitment of £507,603, expiring 1 September 2022.

On 16 March 2016, the Group signed a lease on premises in New York City, at an average annual commitment of $125,840. The lease expired 
on 31 May 2019.

On 1 June 2017, the Group signed a five-year lease on premises in Zürich, at an annual commitment of CHF 49,680.

Record assesses whether a contract is or contains a lease at the inception of the contract.

Right‑of‑use (“ROU”) assets
Right-of-use assets are measured at cost comprising the following:

• 

the amount of the initial measurement of lease liability;

•  any lease payments made at or before the commencement date, less any lease incentives received;

•  any initial direct costs; and

•  an estimate of costs to be incurred to restore the assets to the condition required by the terms and conditions of the lease.

Depreciation is calculated on a straight-line basis over the lease term and included within administration costs (note 5).

Net book value of right‑of‑use assets

Year ended 31 March 2021 

Net book value at 1 April 2020 

Addition 

Depreciation 

FX revaluation 

Net book value at 31 March 2021 

Year ended 31 March 2020 

Net book value on transition at 1 April 2019 

Addition 

Depreciation 

FX revaluation 

Net book value at 31 March 2020 

Lease liabilities

Current 

Non-current 

Total lease liabilities 

At 1 April 2020 

Interest expense 

Lease payments 

Lease interest payments 

Foreign exchange movements 

At 31 March 2021 

Group 
£’000 

1,175 

— 

(490) 

(1) 

684 

Group 
£’000 

1,560 

114 

(504) 

5 

Company 
£’000

1,096

—

(454)

—

642

Company 
£’000

1,435

114

(453)

—

1,175 

1,096

Group 
£’000 

Company 
£’000

539 

99 

638 

Group 
£’000 

1,159 

38 

(518) 

(38) 

(3) 

638 

501

96

597

Company 
£’000

1,079

35

(482)

(35)

—

597

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements  

115

Lease payments
At 31 March 2021, the undiscounted operating lease payments on an annual basis are as follows:

Maturity of lease liability at 31 March 2021

Within 1 year  

1-2 years 

2-3 years 

After 3 years 

Total lease liability before discounting   

Group 
£’000 

Company 
£’000

556 

100 

— 

— 

656 

518

96

—

—

614

The remainder of the movement in the lease liability relates to non-cash movements. The lease term is determined as the non-cancellable period 
of a lease, together with periods covered by an option to extend the lease if the Group considers that exercise of the option is reasonably certain.

13. Property, plant and equipment – Group
All property, plant and equipment assets are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation. Depreciation of property, plant and equipment is 
provided to write off the cost, less residual value, on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful life as follows:

•  Leasehold improvements – period from lease commencement to the earlier of the lease termination date and the next rent review date

•  Computer equipment – 2 to 5 years

•  Fixtures and fittings – 4 to 6 years

Residual values, remaining useful economic lives and depreciation methods are reviewed annually and adjusted if appropriate. Gains or losses on 
disposal are included in profit or loss.

The Group’s property, plant and equipment comprise leasehold improvements, computer equipment and fixtures and fittings. The carrying amount 
can be analysed as follows:

2021 

Cost 

At 1 April 2020 

Additions 

Disposals 

At 31 March 2021 

Depreciation 

At 1 April 2020 

Charge for the year 

Disposals 

At 31 March 2021 

Net book amounts 

At 31 March 2021 

At 1 April 2020 

Leasehold 
improvements 
£’000 

Computer 
equipment 
£’000 

Fixtures 
and fittings 
£’000 

692 

1 

— 

693 

397 

123 

— 

520 

173 

295 

952 

228 

(197) 

983 

573 

139 

(197) 

515 

468 

379 

327 

2 

(24) 

305 

250 

37 

(24) 

263 

42 

77 

Total 
£’000

1,971

231

(221)

1,981

1,220

299

(221)

1,298

683

751

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
116 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Notes to the financial statements continued

For the year ended 31 March 2021

13. Property, plant and equipment – Group continued

2020 

Cost 

At 1 April 2019 

Additions 

Disposals 

At 31 March 2020 

Depreciation 

At 1 April 2019 

Charge for the year 

Disposals 

At 31 March 2020 

Net book amounts 

At 31 March 2020 

At 1 April 2019 

The Group’s tangible non-current assets are located predominantly in the UK.

14. Investments

Investment in subsidiaries at cost 

Capitalised investment in respect of share-based payments 

Investment in funds  

Investment in impact bonds 

Total investments 

Leasehold 
improvements 
£’000 

Computer 
equipment 
£’000 

Fixtures 
and fittings 
£’000 

692 

— 

— 

692 

271 

126 

— 

397 

295 

421 

711 

241 

— 

952 

484 

89 

— 

573 

379 

227 

325 

2 

— 

327 

212 

38 

— 

250 

77 

113 

 Group 

 Company

2021 
£’000 

— 

— 

847 

2,199 

3,046 

2020 
£’000 

— 

— 

— 

2,472 

2,472 

2021 
£’000 

69 

1,460 

2,786 

— 

4,315 

Total 
£’000

1,728

243

—

1,971

967

253

—

1,220

751

761

2020 
£’000

166

1,279

2,071

—

3,516

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements  

117

Company
Investments in subsidiaries
Investments in subsidiaries are shown at cost less impairment losses. The capitalised investment in respect of share-based payments offered by 
subsidiaries is equal to the cumulative fair value of the amounts payable to employees recognised as an expense by the subsidiary.

Investment in subsidiaries (at cost) 

Record Currency Management Limited 

Record Group Services Limited 

Record Portfolio Management Limited 

Record Currency Management (US) Inc. 

Record Currency Management (Switzerland) GmbH 

Trade Record Ltd 

Record Asset Management GmbH 

Record Fund Management Limited 

N P Record Trustees Limited 

Total investment in subsidiaries (at cost) 

Capitalised investment in respect of share-based payments 

Record Group Services Limited 

Record Currency Management (US) Inc. 

Record Currency Management (Switzerland) GmbH 

Total capitalised investment in respect of share-based payments 

Total investment in subsidiaries 

Particulars of subsidiary undertakings
Name 

 Nature of business

2021 
£’000 

2020 
£’000

10 

10 

10 

— 

16 

— 

23 

— 

— 

69 

10

10

10

—

16

120

—

—

—

166

1,341 

1,186

89 

30 

1,460 

1,529 

89

4

1,279

1,445 

Record Currency Management Limited 

 Currency management services (FCA, SEC and CFTC registered)

Record Group Services Limited 

 Management services to other Group undertakings

Record Currency Management (US) Inc. 

 US advisory and service company (SEC and CFTC registered) 

Record Currency Management (Switzerland) GmbH 

 Swiss advisory and service company

Trade Record Ltd 

Record Asset Management GmbH 

Record Portfolio Management Limited 

Record Fund Management Limited 

N P Record Trustees Limited 

 Prize competition allowing subscribers to trade virtual money  
 across asset classes

 German advisory and service company

 Dormant

 Dormant

 Dormant trust company

The Group’s interest in the equity capital of subsidiary undertakings is 100% of the ordinary share capital in all cases. Record Currency 
Management (US) Inc. is incorporated in Delaware (registered office: Corporation Service Company, 251 Little Falls Drive, Wilmington, DE 19808), 
Record Currency Management (Switzerland) GmbH is incorporated in Zürich (registered office: Münsterhof 14, 8001 Zürich) and Record Asset 
Management GmbH is incorporated Germany (registered office: Königsallee 92a, 40212 Düsseldorf).

Investment in Trade Record Ltd (“Trade Record”)
On 21 December 2020, Record plc disposed of its 40% shareholding in the ordinary share capital of Trade Record Ltd. Proceeds of the disposal 
amounted to £120,000 which equated to the Company’s total investment at cost.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
118 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Notes to the financial statements continued

For the year ended 31 March 2021

14. Investments continued
Company continued
Capitalised investment in respect of share-based payments
The accounting treatment of capitalised investment in respect of share-based payments can be found in note 23.

Investment in seed funds
In addition to the subsidiaries listed above, the Company holds investments in seed funds. These funds are seed investments, which have various 
investment objectives and policies and are subject to the terms and conditions of their offering documentation. The principal activity of each is to 
invest capital from investors in a portfolio of assets in order to provide a return for those investors.

The seed fund investments are presented within investments in the Company statement of financial position, and all seed fund entities are 
sub-funds of the Record Umbrella Fund, an open-ended umbrella unit trust authorised in Ireland. The two seed funds invested in by the Company 
are shown in the table below.

Group
Entities are consolidated on a line-by-line basis where the Group has determined that a controlling interest exists through an investment holding in 
the entity, in accordance with IFRS 10 – “Consolidated Financial Statements”. Otherwise, investments in entities are measured at fair value through 
profit or loss.

Investment in seed funds
The Group has controlled the Record Currency – Strategy Development Fund and Record – Currency Multi-Strategy Fund throughout both the 
year ended 31 March 2021 and the comparative year. Both funds were consolidated in full, on a line-by-line basis in the Group’s financial 
statements throughout these periods.

Investment in seed funds  

Record Currency – Strategy Development Fund  

Record – Currency Multi-Strategy Fund 

Total investment in seed funds 

Group 

2021 
£’000 

— 

— 

— 

2020 
£’000 

— 

— 

— 

 Company

2021 
£’000 

1,077 

862 

1,939 

2020 
£’000

1,181

890

2,071

Investment in impact bonds
In January 2020, the Group invested £2,287,241 in impact bonds; the fair value at the year end was £2,198,886 (prior year: £2,472,241). 
Impact bonds are measured at fair value through profit or loss. 

15. Deferred taxation – Group
Deferred tax is the future tax consequences of temporary differences between the carrying amounts and tax bases of assets and liabilities shown 
on the statement of financial position. The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the expected manner of recovery or settlement of the 
carrying amount of assets and liabilities, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the statement of financial position date.

A deferred tax asset is recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the asset can be 
utilised. The carrying amounts of the deferred tax assets are reviewed at each statement of financial position date and reduced to the extent that it 
is no longer probable that sufficient taxable profit will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be recovered.

A deferred tax liability is generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences.

Deferred tax assets or liabilities arising on goodwill are not recognised but are however recognised on separately identifiable intangible assets. 
Deferred tax arising on the initial recognition of an asset or liability, other than a business combination, that at the time of the transaction affects 
neither the accounting profit or loss nor the taxable profit or loss, is not recognised.

Credit/(charge) to income statement in year 

(Liability) brought forward 

Asset/(liability) carried forward 

2021 
£’000 

298 

(86) 

212 

2020 
£’000

(57)

(29)

(86)

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements  

119

The deferred tax asset/(liability) consists of the tax effect of temporary differences in respect of:

Deferred tax allowance on unvested share options 

Excess of taxation allowances over depreciation on fixed assets 

Total 

2021 
£’000 

320 

(108) 

212 

2020 
£’000

1

(87)

(86)

At the year end there were share options not exercised with an intrinsic value for tax purposes of £3,755,976 (2020: £7,357). On exercise the 
Group will be entitled to a corporation tax deduction in respect of the difference between the exercise price and the strike price. There is no 
unprovided deferred taxation. Deferred tax has been calculated based on the current tax rate of 19% and it is subject to change if tax rates 
change in future years. It was announced in the March 2021 Budget that Corporation Tax will increase to 25% on 1 April 2023.

16. Trade and other receivables
Trade and other receivables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, 
less loss allowances. The amortised cost of trade and other receivables is stated at original invoice value, as the interest that would be recognised 
from discounting future cash receipts over the short credit period is not considered to be material.

The Group applies the IFRS 9 simplified approach to measuring expected credit losses (“ECLs”) for trade receivables at an amount equal to 
lifetime ECLs. The ECLs on trade receivables are calculated based on actual historic credit loss experience over the preceding 25 years on the 
total balance of non-credit impaired trade receivables. Accrued income relates to accrued management and performance fees earned but not 
yet invoiced.

An analysis of receivables is provided below:

Trade receivables 

Accrued income 

Other receivables 

Prepayments 

Total 

Group 

 Company

2021 
£’000 

6,519 

37 

470 

980 

2020 
£’000 

5,192 

2,264 

308 

940 

2021 
£’000 

1,345 

— 

— 

42 

8,006 

8,704 

1,387 

2020 
£’000

142

—

—

—

142

All amounts are short-term. The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade and other receivables approximates to their fair value. 
The Group has not renegotiated the terms of any receivables in the year ended 31 March 2021. The Group’s trade receivables are generally 
short-term and do not contain significant financing components. 

The Group applies the IFRS 9 simplified approach to measuring ECLs for trade receivables and contract assets at an amount equal to lifetime 
ECLs. The ECLs on trade receivables are calculated based on actual historic credit loss experience over the preceding 25 years on the total 
balance of non-credit impaired trade receivables. Contract assets relate to accrued management and performance fees earned but not yet 
invoiced and have substantially the same risk characteristics as the trade receivables. The Group has therefore concluded that the ECLs for 
trade receivables are a reasonable approximation of the loss rates for the contract assets. The Group does not expect to incur any credit 
losses and has not recognised any ECLs in the current year (2020: £nil).

17. Derivative financial assets and liabilities
Derivative financial instruments are initially recognised at cost on the date on which the contract is first entered into unless the fair value at 
acquisition is different to cost, in which case fair value is recognised. Subsequently they are measured at fair value with gains and losses 
recognised in profit or loss. Transaction costs are immediately recognised in profit or loss. The fair values of derivative financial instruments 
are determined by reference to active market transactions.

The Group holds derivative financial instruments for two purposes. The Group uses forward foreign exchange contracts to reduce the risk associated 
with assets denominated in foreign currencies, and additionally uses both foreign exchange options and forward foreign exchange contracts in order 
to achieve a return within the seed funds. The instruments are recognised at fair value. The fair value of the contracts is calculated using the market 
rates prevailing at the period end date. The net gain or loss on instruments is included within other income or expense.

Derivative financial assets 

Forward foreign exchange contracts held to hedge non-sterling based assets 

Forward foreign exchange contracts held for trading 

Foreign exchange options held for trading  

Total 

2021 
£’000 

— 

215 

45 

260 

2020 
£’000

—

178

15

193

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
120 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Notes to the financial statements continued

For the year ended 31 March 2021

17. Derivative financial assets and liabilities continued

Derivative financial liabilities 

Forward foreign exchange contracts held to hedge non-sterling based assets 

Forward foreign exchange contracts held for trading 

Total 

2021 
£’000 

— 

(16) 

(16) 

2020 
£’000

(316)

(294)

(610)

Derivative financial instruments held to hedge non‑sterling based assets
At 31 March 2021 there were outstanding contracts with a principal value of £9,076,940 (31 March 2020: £10,993,268) for the sale of foreign 
currencies in the normal course of business. The fair value of the contracts is calculated using the market forward contract rates prevailing at 
31 March 2021. The Group does not apply hedge accounting.

The net gain or loss on forward foreign exchange contracts held to hedge non-sterling based assets is as follows:

Derivative financial instruments held to hedge non-sterling based assets 

Net loss on forward foreign exchange contracts at fair value through profit or loss 

2021 
£’000 

673 

2020 
£’000

509

Derivative financial instruments held for trading
The Record – Currency Multi-Strategy Fund and the Record Currency – Strategy Development Fund may use a variety of instruments including 
forward foreign exchange contracts, options and futures in order to achieve a return. 

All derivative financial instruments held by the Record – Currency Multi-Strategy Fund and the Record Currency – Strategy Development Fund 
were classified as held for trading throughout the period.

At 31 March 2021 there were outstanding contracts with a principal value of £10,383,964 (31 March 2020: £23,425,316).

The net gain or loss on derivative financial instruments held for trading for the year was as follows:

Derivative financial instruments held to hedge non-sterling based assets 

Net loss on forward foreign exchange contracts and foreign exchange options at fair value through profit or loss 

2021 
£’000 

53 

2020 
£’000

323

18. Cash management
The Group’s cash management strategy employs a variety of treasury management instruments including cash, money market deposits and 
treasury bills. Whilst the Group manages and considers all of these instruments as cash, which are subject to its own internal cash management 
process, not all of these instruments are classified as cash or cash equivalents under IFRS.

IFRS defines cash and cash equivalents as cash in hand, on demand and collateral deposits held with banks, and other short-term highly liquid 
investments that are readily convertible to a known amount of cash and are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value. Moreover, 
instruments can only generally be classified as cash and cash equivalents where they are held for the purpose of meeting short-term cash 
commitments rather than for investment or other purposes.

In the Group’s judgement, bank deposits and treasury bills with maturities in excess of three months do not meet the definition of short-term 
or highly liquid and are held for purposes other than meeting short-term commitments. In accordance with IFRS, these instruments are not 
categorised as cash or cash equivalents and are disclosed as money market instruments with maturities >3 months.

Assets managed as cash 

Bank deposits with maturities > 3 months  

Treasury bills with maturities > 3 months 

Money market instruments with maturities > 3 months 

Cash  

Bank deposits with maturities <= 3 months 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Total assets managed as cash  

Group 

 Company

2021 
£’000 

12,932 

— 

12,932 

2,372 

4,475 

6,847 

19,779 

2020 
£’000 

7,958 

— 

7,958 

8,004 

6,290 

14,294 

22,252 

2021 
£’000 

2020 
£’000

— 

— 

— 

173 

— 

173 

173 

—

—

—

2,241

—

2,241

2,241

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements  

121

Cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents – sterling 

Cash and cash equivalents – USD 

Cash and cash equivalents – CHF 

Cash and cash equivalents – other currencies 

Total cash and cash equivalents 

Group 

 Company

2021 
£’000 

 3,108 

 2,692  

 183 

 864 

2020 
£’000 

10,426 

3,654 

161 

53 

2021 
£’000 

173 

— 

— 

— 

2020 
£’000

2,241

—

—

—

6,847 

14,294 

173 

2,241

The Group cash and cash equivalents balance incorporates the cash and cash equivalents held by any fund deemed to be under control of 
Record plc (refer to notes 1 and 14 for explanation of accounting treatment). As at 31 March 2021, the cash and cash equivalents held by the 
seed funds over which the Group had control totalled £3,159,533 (31 March 2020: £2,731,819) and the money market instruments with 
maturities > 3 months held by these funds were £427,957 (31 March 2020: £1,599,741). 

Details of how the Group manages credit risk are provided in note 24.

19. Current liabilities
Trade and other payables are stated at their original invoice value, as the interest that would be recognised from discounting future cash payments 
over the short payment period is not considered to be material.

Trade and other payables 

Trade payables 

Amounts owed to Group undertaking 

Other payables 

Other tax and social security 

Accruals 

Total 

Group 

 Company

2021 
£’000 

384 

— 

16 

486 

2,540 

3,426 

2020 
£’000 

425 

— 

11 

443 

2,130 

3,009 

2021 
£’000 

2020 
£’000

— 

10 

— 

— 

6 

16 

—

10

—

—

—

10

Accruals include £1,644,761 for the Group Profit Share Scheme (31 March 2020: £1,597,350). The Directors consider that the carrying amount of 
trade and other payables approximates to their fair value.

Current tax liabilities 

Corporation tax 

Group 

 Company

2021 
£’000 

315 

2020 
£’000 

601 

2021 
£’000 

— 

2020 
£’000

2

20. Financial liabilities
Record plc has made investments in a number of seed funds where it is in a position to be able to control those funds by virtue of the size of its 
holding. When Record plc is not the only investor in such funds and the external investment instrument does not meet the definition of an equity 
instrument under IAS 32 then the instrument is classified as a financial liability. The financial liabilities are measured at cost plus movement in value 
of the third-party investment in the fund.

The Record – Currency Multi-Strategy Fund and the Record Currency – Strategy Development Fund were considered to be under control of 
the Group as the combined holding of Record plc and its Directors constituted a majority interest throughout the current and prior years.

The mark-to-market value of units held by investors in these funds other than Record plc are shown as financial liabilities in the Group financial 
statements, in accordance with IFRS.

Mark‑to‑market value of external holding in seed funds consolidated into the accounts of the Record Group

Record – Currency Multi-Strategy Fund 

Record Currency – Strategy Development Fund 

Total financial liabilities 

2021 
£’000 

1,696 

— 

1,696 

2020 
£’000

2,191

—

2,191

The financial liabilities relate only to the fair value of the external investors’ holding in the seed funds, and are in no sense debt.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
122 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Notes to the financial statements continued

For the year ended 31 March 2021

21. Provisions
The Group has provisions reflecting its contractual obligations connected to reaching the end of its contractual lease terms.

Provisions 

Group 

 Company

2021 
£’000 

200 

2020 
£’000 

200 

2021 
£’000 

200 

2020 
£’000

200

22. Issued share capital
The share capital of Record plc consists only of fully paid ordinary shares with a par value of 0.025p each. All shares are equally eligible to receive 
dividends and the repayment of capital and represent one vote at the shareholders’ meeting.

Authorised 

Ordinary shares of 0.025p each 

Called-up, allotted and fully paid 

Ordinary shares of 0.025p each 

2021 

  2020

£’000 

Number 

£’000 

Number

100  400,000,000 

100  400,000,000

50  199,054,325 

50  199,054,325

Movement in Record plc shares held by the Record plc Employee Benefit Trust (“EBT”)
The EBT was formed to hold shares acquired under the Record plc share-based compensation plans. Under IFRS the EBT is considered to 
be under de facto control of the Group, and has therefore been consolidated into the Group financial statements.

Neither the purchase nor sale of own shares leads to a gain or loss being recognised in the Group statement of comprehensive income.

Record plc shares held by EBT as at 31 March 2019   

Adjustment for net purchases by EBT 

Record plc shares held by EBT as at 31 March 2020   

Adjustment for net purchases by EBT 

Record plc shares held by EBT as at 31 March 2021   

Number

2,986,036

233,351

3,219,387

3,077,270

6,296,657

The holding of the EBT comprises own shares that have not vested unconditionally to employees of the Group. Own shares are recorded at cost 
and are deducted from retained earnings.

Further information regarding the Record plc share-based compensation plans and relevant transactions made during the year is included 
in note 23.

23. Share-based payments
During the year ended 31 March 2021 the Group has managed the following share-based compensation plans: 

a)  the Group Profit Share Scheme: share awards issued under the Group Profit Share Scheme are classified as share-based payments 

with cash alternatives under IFRS 2;

b)  the Record plc Share Scheme: share options issued under the Record plc Share Scheme are classified as equity-settled share-based 

payments under IFRS 2;

c)  the Record plc Share Incentive Plan: the Group operates the Record plc Share Incentive Plan (“SIP”) to encourage more widespread ownership 
of Record plc shares by employees. The SIP is a tax-approved scheme offering attractive tax savings for employees retaining their shares in 
the scheme over the medium to long term; and

d)  the Record plc Jointly Owned Share Plan: participants’ interests awarded under the Jointly Owned Share Plan (“JSOP”) are classified 

as equity-settled share-based payments under IFRS 2.

All obligations arising from the four schemes have been fulfilled through purchasing shares in the market.

a. Group Profit Share Scheme
Share-based payments with cash alternatives
These transactions are compound financial instruments, which include a debt element and a cash element. The fair value of the debt component 
of the amounts payable to the employee is calculated as the cash amount alternative offered to the employee at grant date and the fair value of 
the equity component of the amounts payable to the employee is calculated as the market value of the share award at grant date less the cash 
forfeited in order to receive the share award. The debt component is charged to profit or loss over the period in which the award is earned and 
remeasured at fair value at each reporting date. The equity component is charged to profit or loss over the period in which the award is earned.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements  

123

The Group Profit Share Scheme allocates a proportion of operating profits to a profit share pool to be distributed between all employees of the 
Group. The Remuneration Committee has the discretion to vary the proportion allocated to the profit share pool between 25% and 35% of 
operating profits. Directors and senior employees receive one-third of their profit share in cash, one-third in shares (“Earned Shares”) and may 
elect to receive the final third as cash only or to allocate some, or all, of the amount for the purchase of Additional Shares. The charge to profit or 
loss in respect of Earned Shares in the period was £765,606 (2020: £838,483). Other employees receive two-thirds of their profit share in cash 
and may elect to receive the final third as cash only or to allocate some, or all, of the amount for the purchase of Additional Shares.

All shares which are the subject of share awards vest immediately and are transferred to a nominee, allowing the employee, as beneficial owner, 
to retain full rights in respect of the shares purchased. Shares awarded under the Group Profit Share Scheme are subject to restrictions over 
subsequent sale and transfer and these restrictions are automatically lifted over one-third on each anniversary of the Profit Share payment date 
for the next three years. In the meantime, these shares cannot be sold, transferred or otherwise disposed of without the consent of the 
Remuneration Committee.

The Group Profit Share Scheme rules contain clawback provisions allowing for the repayment of profit share payments under certain 
circumstances including a material breach of contract, an error in performance of duties or a restatement of accounts which leads to a change 
in any prior award under the scheme.

b. The Record plc Share Scheme
Equity-settled share-based payments
The fair value of the amounts payable to employees under these awards is recognised as an expense over the vesting period of the award, 
with a corresponding increase in equity. All such awards made by the Group involve the parent company granting rights to its equity instruments 
to employees of its subsidiary. Consequently, the subsidiary measures the services received from its employees in accordance with the above 
classification under IFRS 2 and recognises a corresponding increase in equity as a contribution from the parent. The parent has the obligation to 
settle the transaction with the subsidiary’s employees and therefore recognises an increase in its investment in the subsidiary and a corresponding 
increase in equity.

The fair value of options granted is measured at grant date using an appropriate valuation model, taking into account the terms and conditions 
upon which the instruments were granted including any market or performance conditions, and using quoted share prices.

The Record plc Share Scheme allows deferred share awards to be granted to employees and Directors in the Record Group. Part 1 of 
the scheme allows the grant of tax-unapproved (“Unapproved”) options to employees and Directors and Part 2 allows the grant of HMRC 
tax-approved (“Approved”) options to employees and Directors. Each participant may be granted Approved options over shares with a total 
market value of up to £30,000 on the date of grant. There is no such limit on the value of grant for Unapproved options, which have historically 
been granted with a market value exercise price in the same way as for the Approved options.

Options over an aggregate of 3,850,000 shares were granted under the Share Scheme during the year (2020: 3,935,000), which were all granted 
as Unapproved options (2020: all granted as Unapproved options). All options were granted with an exercise price per share equal to the share 
price prevailing at the time of grant.

The 3,425,000 Unapproved options issued to employees on 21 September 2020 each become exercisable in four equal tranches on the first, 
second, third and fourth anniversary of the date of grant, subject to the employee being in employment with the Group at the relevant vesting date 
and to the extent performance conditions have been satisfied.

The 300,000 Unapproved options issued to employees on 25 January 2021 each become exercisable in four equal tranches on the first, second, 
third and fourth anniversary of the date of grant, subject to the employee being in employment with the Group at the relevant vesting date and to 
the extent performance conditions have been satisfied.

The 125,000 Unapproved options issued to employees on 9 March 2021 each become exercisable in four equal tranches on the first, second, 
third and fourth anniversary of the date of grant, subject to the employee being in employment with the Group at the relevant vesting date and to 
the extent performance conditions have been satisfied.

The fair value of the services provided by employees has been calculated indirectly by reference to the fair value of the equity instruments granted. 
Fair value amounts for the options granted in the year ended 31 March 2021, and for which a charge to profit or loss was made in the year, 
were determined using a Black-Scholes option-pricing method and the following assumptions:

Model input 

Share price  

Dividend yield 

Exercise price 

Expected volatility 

Option life 

Risk-free interest rate (%) 

Expected volatility is based on historical volatility.

  Weighted average value

39.1p

7.23%

39.1p

35%

2.5 years

0.10%

The Group share-based payment expense in respect of the Share Scheme was £181,095 for the year ended 31 March 2021 (2020: £83,799).

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
124 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Notes to the financial statements continued

For the year ended 31 March 2021

23. Share-based payments continued
b. The Record plc Share Scheme continued
Outstanding share options
At 31 March 2021, the total number of ordinary shares of 0.025p outstanding under Record plc share compensation schemes was 11,844,421 
(2020: 11,895,515). These deferred share awards and options are over issued shares, a proportion of which are hedged by shares held in an EBT. 
Details of outstanding share options awarded to employees are set out below:

Date of grant 

01/12/15 

27/01/16 

27/01/16 

27/01/16 

27/01/16 

30/11/16 

30/11/16 

30/11/16 

26/01/18 

26/01/18 

26/01/18 

26/01/18 

29/03/19 

29/03/19 

21/08/19 

18/03/20 

21/09/20 

25/01/21 

09/03/21 

At 1 April  
2020 

600,000 

106,250 

244,064 

109,167 

24,167 

288,574 

695,000 

1,466,668 

1,310,000 

236,625 

52,000 

1,933,000 

525,000 

370,000 

1,985,000 

1,950,000 

Granted 

Exercised 

Lapsed/   At 31 March 
2021 
forfeited 

Earliest 
vesting date 

Latest  
vesting date1 

Exercise  
price

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(600,000) 

(106,250) 

(244,064) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(109,167) 

(24,167) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

01/12/20 

01/12/20 

£0.2888

27/01/20 

27/01/20 

£0.2450

27/01/20 

27/01/20 

£0.2450

27/01/21 

27/01/21 

£0.2450

27/01/21 

27/01/21 

£0.2450

(198,574) 

(632,500) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

90,000 

30/11/20 

30/11/20 

£0.34072

62,500 

30/11/19 

30/11/20 

£0.34072

(733,332) 

733,336 

30/11/20 

30/11/21 

£0.34072

(42,500) 

1,267,500 

26/01/22 

26/01/22 

£0.4350

(78,875) 

(30,000) 

127,750 

26/01/20 

26/01/22 

£0.4350

— 

— 

— 

(17,333) 

34,667 

26/01/21 

26/01/23 

£0.4350

(644,332) 

1,288,668 

26/01/21 

26/01/23 

£0.4350

(65,000) 

460,000 

29/03/23 

29/03/23 

£0.2830

(92,500) 

— 

— 

— 

277,500 

29/03/20 

29/03/23 

£0.2830

1,985,000 

21/08/22 

21/08/24 

£0.3110

(32,500) 

(250,000) 

1,667,500 

18/03/21 

18/03/24 

£0.28902

— 

— 

— 

3,425,000 

300,000 

125,000 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

3,425,000 

21/09/21 

21/09/24 

£0.3730

300,000 

25/01/22 

25/01/25 

£0.49425

125,000 

09/03/22 

09/03/25 

£0.63986

Total options 

  11,895,515 

3,850,000 

(1,385,263) 

(2,515,831)  11,844,421 

Weighted average  
exercise price of options 

£0.34 

£0.39 

£0.43 

£0.34 

£0.36 

1.  Under the terms of the deeds of grants, options are exercisable for twelve months following the vesting date.

During the year 1,385,263 options were exercised. The weighted average share price at date of exercise was £0.43. At 31 March 2021 a total 
of 701,375 options had vested and were exercisable (2020: 869,189). At 31 March 2021 the weighted average exercise price of the options 
vested and exercisable was £0.31 (2020: £0.30) and the weighted average contractual life was two years (2020: three years).

The Directors’ interests in the combined share schemes are as follows:

Record plc Group Profit Share Scheme (interest in restricted share awards) 

Leslie Hill  

Bob Noyen (stepped down from the Board of Record plc on 5 February 2021) 

Steve Cullen 

Record plc Share Scheme (interest in unvested share options) 

Leslie Hill  

Bob Noyen (stepped down from the Board of Record plc on 5 February 2021) 

Steve Cullen 

 Ordinary shares held as at

31 March  
2021 

31 March  

2020

379,841 

613,458

277,568 

311,296

75,849 

142,648

945,001 

1,405,001

945,001 

1,405,001

526,668 

935,000

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements  

125

Performance measures
Performance conditions attached to all options granted to Board Directors differ to those granted for all other staff. All Executive Director option 
awards are subject to a performance condition and vest on each of the third, fourth and fifth anniversaries of the date of grant subject to an 
earnings per share (“EPS”) hurdle linked to the annualised EPS growth for the respective three, four and five-year periods from grant. Vesting is on 
a stepped basis, with 25% of each tranche vesting if EPS growth over the relevant period is at least RPI plus 4% per annum, increasing through 
50%, 75% and with 100% vesting if EPS growth exceeds RPI plus 13%, as shown in the table below. Options awarded subject to EPS 
performance conditions are valued using a Black-Scholes model, adjusted for the impact of the performance conditions.

Record’s average EPS growth   

>RPI growth + 13% 

>RPI growth + 10%, =RPI growth + 7%, =RPI growth + 4%, = 3 months 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Total financial assets 

2021 
£’000 

6,519 

37 

470 

260 

13,613 

6,166 

27,065 

2020 
£’000

5,192

2,264

308

193

7,958

14,294

30,209

The debtors’ age analysis is also evaluated on a regular basis for expected credit losses. It is management’s opinion that there is no requirement 
to provide for any expected credit losses. The table below is an analysis of trade receivables and accrued income by due date:

At 31 March 2021 

Trade receivables 

Accrued income 

Total 

Carrying 
amount 
£’000 

6,519 

37 

6,556 

Neither  
impaired nor  
past due 
£’000 

0-3 months 
past due 
£’000 

More than 
3 months 
past due 
£’000

6,519 

37 

6,556 

100% 

— 

— 

— 

0% 

—

—

—

0%

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
128 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Notes to the financial statements continued

For the year ended 31 March 2021

24. Financial risk management continued
The impact of covid‑19 continued

At 31 March 2020 

Trade receivables 

Accrued income 

Total 

Carrying 
amount 
£’000 

5,192 

2,264 

7,456 

Neither  
impaired nor  
past due 
£’000 

0-3 months 
past due 
£’000 

More than 
3 months 
past due 
£’000

5,041 

2,264 

7,305 

98% 

5 

— 

5 

0% 

146

—

146

2%

The Group offers standard credit terms of 30 days from invoice date. It is the Group’s policy to assess debtors for expected loss on an individual 
basis and to make a provision where it is considered necessary. In assessing recoverability, the Group takes into account any indicators of 
impairment up to the reporting date. The application of this policy generally results in debts that are past due not being provided for unless 
individual circumstances indicate that a debt is impaired.

Trade receivables are made up of 82 debtors’ balances (2020: 62). The largest individual debtor corresponds to 15% of the total balance 
(2020: 15%). Debtor days, based on the generally accepted calculation of debtor days, is 94 days (2020: 74 days). This reflects the quarterly 
billing cycle used by the Group for the vast majority of its fees. As at 31 March 2021, 0% of debt was overdue (2020: 2%). No debtors’ balances 
have been renegotiated during the year or in the prior year.

Liquidity risk
The Group is exposed to liquidity risk, namely that it may be unable to meet its payment obligations as they fall due. The Group maintains 
sufficient cash and marketable securities to be able to meet all such obligations. Management review cash flow forecasts on a regular basis to 
determine whether the Group has sufficient cash reserves to meet the future working capital requirements and to take advantage of business 
opportunities. The average creditor payment period is 29 days (2020: 29 days).

The impact of covid-19 has been considered, and management believe that the Group’s ability to meet its obligations is unaffected.

Contractual maturity analysis for financial liabilities

At 31 March 2021 

Trade payables 

Accruals 

Derivative financial liabilities  

Total 

At 31 March 2020 

Trade payables 

Accruals 

Derivative financial liabilities  

Total 

Carrying 
amount 
£’000 

384 

2,538 

16 

2,938 

Carrying 
amount 
£’000 

425 

2,130 

610 

3,165 

Due or due  Due between  Due between 
3 months 
in less than 
and 1 year 
1 month 
£’000
£’000 

1 and  
3 months 
£’000 

191 

420 

6 

617 

30 

809 

10 

849 

163

1,309

—

1,472

Due or due  Due between  Due between 
3 months 
in less than 
and 1 year 
1 month 
£’000
£’000 

1 and  
3 months 
£’000 

425 

67 

148 

640 

— 

1,793 

462 

2,255 

—

270

—

270

Interest rate risk
Interest rate risk is the risk that the value of a financial instrument or cash flows associated with the instrument will fluctuate due to changes 
in market interest rates. Interest rate risk arises from interest-bearing financial assets and liabilities held by the Group. Interest-bearing assets 
comprise money market instruments and cash and cash equivalents which are considered to be short-term liquid assets. It is the Group’s policy 
to settle trade payables within the credit terms allowed and the Group does not therefore incur interest on overdue balances.

A sensitivity analysis has not been disclosed for the impact of interest rate changes as any reasonable range of change in interest rate would 
not directly have a material impact on profit or equity.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements  

129

Interest rate profiles

At 31 March 2021 

Financial assets 

Trade receivables 

Accrued income 

Other receivables 

Derivative financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 

Money market instruments with maturities > 3 months 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Total financial assets 

Financial liabilities 

Trade payables 

Accruals 

Lease liability 

Derivative financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss 

Financial liabilities  

Total financial liabilities 

At 31 March 2020 

Financial assets 

Trade receivables 

Accrued income 

Other receivables 

Derivative financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 

Money market instruments with maturities > 3 months 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Total financial assets 

Financial liabilities 

Trade payables 

Accruals 

Lease liability 

Derivative financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss 

Financial liabilities  

Total financial liabilities 

Fixed rate 
£’000 

Floating rate 
£’000 

No 
interest rate 
£’000 

Total 
£’000

Fixed rate 
£’000 

Floating rate 
£’000 

No 
interest rate 
£’000 

— 

— 

— 

— 

12,932 

682 

13,614 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

6,165 

6,165 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

7,958 

6,271 

14,229 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

8,023 

8,023 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

6,519 

6,519

37 

470 

260 

— 

— 

7,286 

37

470

260

12,932

6,847

27,065

(384) 

(384)

(2,538) 

(2,538)

(539) 

(16) 

(1,696) 

(5,173) 

5,191 

2,264 

308 

193 

— 

— 

7,956 

(539)

(16)

(1,696)

(5,173)

Total 
£’000

5,191

2,264

308

193

7,958

14,294

30,208

(425) 

(425)

(2,130) 

(2,130)

(544) 

(610) 

(2,191) 

(5,900) 

(544)

(610)

(2,191)

(5,900))

Foreign currency risk
Foreign currency risk refers to the risk that the value of a financial commitment or recognised asset or liability will fluctuate due to changes in 
foreign currency rates. The Group makes use of forward foreign exchange contracts to manage the risk relating to future transactions in 
accordance with the Group’s risk management policy. 

The Group is exposed to foreign currency risk on revenue invoices and cash holdings that are denominated in a currency other than sterling, 
and also on assets and liabilities held by the Record Currency – Strategy Development Fund. The principal currencies giving rise to this risk are 
the US dollar, the Swiss franc, the euro and the Canadian dollar.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
130 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Notes to the financial statements continued

For the year ended 31 March 2021

24. Financial risk management continued 
Foreign currency risk
During the year ended 31 March 2021, the Group invoiced the following amounts in currencies other than sterling:

Swiss franc (CHF) 

US dollar (USD) 

Euro (EUR)  

Australian dollar (AUD) 

Canadian dollar (CAD) 

Swedish krona (SEK) 

Singapore dollar (SGD) 

2021 

  2020

Local  
currency 
value 
£’000 

13,375 

13,185 

3,185 

838 

1,238 

672 

14 

Value in 
reporting 
currency 
£’000 

Local  
currency 
value 
£’000 

Value in 
reporting 
currency 
£’000

11,072 

14,416 

11,533

9,912 

3,828 

467 

719 

49 

8 

9,217 

3,028 

1,520 

742 

1,436 

25 

7,274

2,644

804

436

101

14

The value of revenues for the year ended 31 March 2021 that were denominated in currencies other than sterling was £24.7 million 
(31 March 2020: £22.8 million).

Record’s policy is to reduce the risk associated with the Group’s revenues denominated in foreign currencies by using forward fixed rate currency 
sales contracts, taking into account any forecast foreign currency cash flows.

The settlement of these forward foreign exchange contracts is expected to occur within the following three months. Changes in the fair values 
of forward foreign exchange contracts are recognised directly in profit or loss.

The cash denominated in currencies other than sterling (refer to note 18) is covered by the Group’s hedging process, therefore the Directors 
consider that the foreign currency risk on cash balances is not material.

Foreign currency risk – sensitivity analysis
The Group has considered the sensitivity to exchange rate movements by considering the impact on those revenues, costs, assets and liabilities 
denominated in foreign currencies as experienced in the given period.

Sterling weakening by 10% against the dollar 

Sterling strengthening by 10% against the dollar  

Sterling weakening by 10% against the Swiss franc  

Sterling strengthening by 10% against the Swiss franc 

Impact on profit after tax 
for the year ended 31 March 

Impact on total equity 
as at 31 March

2021 
£’000 

489 

(489) 

551 

(551) 

2020 
£’000 

334 

(334) 

622 

(622) 

2021 
£’000 

489 

(489) 

551 

(551) 

2020 
£’000

334

(334)

622

(622)

Sterling/US dollar exchange rate
The impact of a change of 10% has been selected as this is considered reasonable given the current level of exchange rates and the volatility 
observed on a historical basis and market expectations for future movement. When applied to the average sterling/USD exchange rate of 
£1 = $1.32 this would result in sterling weakening to £1 = $1.20 and sterling strengthening to £1 = $1.46.

Sterling/Swiss franc exchange rate
The impact of a change of 10% has been selected as this is considered reasonable given the current level of exchange rates and the volatility 
observed on a historical basis and market expectations for future movement. When applied to the average sterling/CHF exchange rate of 
£1 = CHF 1.21 this would result in sterling weakening to £1 = CHF 1.10 and sterling strengthening to £1 = CHF 1.35.

Sensitivity analyses have not been disclosed for other currencies as any reasonable range of change in exchange rate would not have a material 
impact on profit or equity.

Concentration risk 
The Group is exposed to concentration risk in respect of product, client type and geographical location, which could lead to over-reliance on any 
one category of revenue. Note 4 provides detail on clients contributing greater than 10% of revenue. Mitigating activities are detailed in the Risk 
management section on page 46.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements  

131

Concentration risk – sensitivity analysis 
The Group has considered the impact of losing the Group’s largest client, assuming that only variable remuneration costs can be reduced in the 
short term.

Loss of largest client 

As part of the Group’s ICAAP process, several more severe scenarios are considered.

Impact on profit after tax 
for the year ended 31 March 

Impact on total equity 
as at 31 March

2021 
£’000 

2,352 

2020 
£’000 

2,214 

2021 
£’000 

2,352 

2020 
£’000

2,214

25. Fair value measurement
The following table presents financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value in the consolidated statement of financial position in accordance 
with the fair value hierarchy. This hierarchy groups financial assets and liabilities into three levels based on the significance of inputs used in 
measuring the fair value of the financial assets and liabilities. The fair value hierarchy has the following levels:

•  Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;

•  Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) 

or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices); and

•  Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

The level within which the financial asset or liability is classified is determined based on the lowest level of input to the fair value measurement. 
The financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value in the statement of financial position are grouped into the fair value hierarchy as follows:

2021 
£’000 

Level 1 
£’000 

Level 2 
£’000 

Level 3 
£’000

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 

Impact bonds 

Forward foreign exchange contracts used by seed funds  

Foreign exchange options used by seed funds 

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss   

Forward foreign exchange contracts used for hedging 

Forward foreign exchange contracts used by seed funds  

2,199 

2,199 

215 

45 

— 

(16) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Total 

2,443 

2,199 

— 

215 

45 

— 

(16) 

244 

—

—

—

—

—

—

2020 
£’000 

Level 1 
£’000 

Level 2 
£’000 

Level 3 
£’000

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 

Impact bonds 

2,472 

2,472 

Forward foreign exchange contracts used by seed funds  

Foreign exchange options used by seed funds 

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss   

Forward foreign exchange contracts used for hedging 

Forward foreign exchange contracts used by seed funds  

178 

15 

(316) 

(294) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Total 

2,055 

2,472 

There have been no transfers between levels in the reporting period (2020: none).

Basis for classification of financial instruments classified as level 1 within the fair value hierarchy
Impact bonds are classified as level 1. These bonds are valued using the market price and coupon rate.

— 

178 

15 

(316) 

(294) 

(417) 

—

—

—

—

—

—

Basis for classification of financial instruments classified as level 2 within the fair value hierarchy
Forward foreign exchange contracts and options are both classified as level 2. Both of these instruments are traded on an active market. 
Options are valued using an industry standard model with inputs based on observable market data whilst the fair value of forward foreign 
exchange contracts may be established using interpolation of observable market data rather than from a quoted price.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
132 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Notes to the financial statements continued

For the year ended 31 March 2021

25. Fair value measurement continued
Classes and fair value of financial instruments
It is the Directors’ opinion that the carrying value of all financial instruments approximates to their fair value.

Categories of financial instrument

At 31 March 2021 

Impact bonds 

Trade and other receivables (excludes prepayments) 

Money market instruments with maturities > 3 months 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Derivative financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 

Trade payables 

Accruals 

Derivative financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss 

Total 

At 31 March 2020 

Impact bonds 

Trade and other receivables (excludes prepayments) 

Money market instruments with maturities > 3 months 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Derivative financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 

Trade payables 

Accruals 

Derivative financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss 

Note 

14 

16 

18 

18 

17 

19 

19 

17 

Note 

14 

16 

18 

18 

17 

19 

19 

17 

Financial 
Assets at 
liabilities  
amortised  measured at 
cost  amortised cost 
£’000 

£’000 

Assets at 
fair value 
through 
profit or loss 
£’000 

Liabilities at 
fair value 
through profit 
or loss 
£’000

— 

7,027 

12,932 

6,847 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(384) 

(2,540) 

— 

2,199 

— 

— 

— 

260 

— 

— 

— 

26,806 

(2,924) 

2,459 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(16)

(16)

Financial 
Assets at 
liabilities  
amortised  measured at 
cost  amortised cost 
£’000 

£’000 

Assets at 
fair value 
through 
profit or loss 
£’000 

Liabilities at 
fair value 
through profit 
or loss 
£’000

— 

7,764 

7,958 

14,294 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(425) 

(2,130) 

— 

2,472 

— 

— 

— 

193 

— 

— 

— 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(610)

(610)

Total 

30,016 

(2,555) 

2,665 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements  

133

26. Related parties transactions
Company
Details of transactions between the Company and other Group undertakings, which are related parties of the Company, are shown below:

Transactions with subsidiaries
The Company’s subsidiary undertakings are listed in note 14, which includes a description of the nature of their business.

Amounts due from subsidiaries 

Net dividends received from subsidiaries   

2021 
£’000 

1,265 

5,270 

2020 
£’000

132

6,030

Amounts owed to and by related parties will be settled in cash. No guarantees have been given or received. No provisions for doubtful debts have 
been raised against amounts outstanding (2020: £nil). No expense has been recognised during the year in respect of bad or doubtful debts due 
from related parties.

Disposal of interest in Trade Record
On 21 December 2020, Record plc disposed of its 40% shareholding in the ordinary share capital of Trade Record Ltd. Proceeds of the disposal 
amounted to £120,000 which equated to the Company’s total investment at cost.

Group
Transactions or balances between Group entities have been eliminated on consolidation, and in accordance with IAS 24, are not disclosed in this note.

Key management personnel compensation

Short-term employee benefits 

Post-employment benefits   

Share-based payments 

Total 

Key management personnel dividends
The dividends paid to key management personnel in the year ended 31 March 2021 totalled £3,028,563 (2020: £3,113,776).

Directors’ remuneration

Emoluments (excluding pension contribution) 

Pension contribution (including payments made in lieu of pension contributions) 

Total 

2021 
£’000 

6,214 

309 

949 

2020 
£’000

5,627

242

909

7,472 

6,778

2021 
£’000 

2,015 

125 

2,140 

2020 
£’000

2,328

163

2,491

During the year, one Director of the Company (2020: one) participated in the Group Personal Pension Plan, a defined contribution scheme. 
Further detail on Directors’ remuneration is provided in the Remuneration report on pages 70 to 85, including detail on payments made to 
Directors for loss of office.

James Wood-Collins left the Board of Directors on 13 February 2020 and left the Group on 13 August 2020 after working his six-month notice 
period. Payments from 1 April to 13 August were £287,804. These payments comprise £105,201 salary, £16,306 cash in lieu of pension, 
£343 medical benefits, £68,954 short-term incentives (GPS cash) and £97,000 for loss of office. No other payments were made to 
former Directors.

During the period, the Trustee of the Record plc EBT entered into a trading plan with the Company in connection with the launch of the JSOP, 
the new share-based incentive scheme. On 21 September 2020, the EBT acquired four million ordinary shares from Neil Record (Non-executive 
Chairman of the Company) at a market price of 37.30 pence per ordinary share, equating to a total consideration of £1,492,000.

Transactions with seed funds
From time to time, the Group injects capital into funds operated by the Group to trial new products (seed capital). If the Group is able to exercise 
control over such a seed fund by holding a majority interest (whether the majority interest is held by Record plc alone, or by combining the 
interests of Record plc and its Directors), then the fund is considered to be a related party.

Record Currency – Strategy Development Fund and Record – Currency Multi-Strategy Fund are all related parties on this basis. 

During the year, Record plc Directors Leslie Hill and Bob Noyen redeemed £167,063 and £256,989 respectively from the Record – Currency  
Multi-Strategy Fund.

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
134 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Notes to the financial statements continued

For the year ended 31 March 2021

27. Capital management
The Group’s objectives when managing capital are (i) to safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern; (ii) to provide an adequate 
return to shareholders; and (iii) to meet regulatory capital requirements set by the UK Financial Conduct Authority.

The Group sets the amount of capital in proportion to risk. The Group manages the capital structure and makes adjustments to it in light of 
changes in economic conditions and the risk characteristics of the underlying assets. In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure, the 
Group may adjust the amount of dividends paid to shareholders, return capital to shareholders, or issue new shares. The Group had no debt in 
the current or prior financial year and consequently does not calculate a debt-to-adjusted capital ratio.

The Group’s capital is managed within the categories set out below:

Regulatory capital 

Other operating capital 

Operating capital 

Seed capital 

Total capital 

2021 
£m 

9.4 

15.5 

24.9 

1.9 

26.8 

2020 
£m

9.4

16.5

25.9

2.1

28.0

Operating capital is intended to cover the regulatory capital requirement plus capital required for day-to-day operational purposes and other 
investment purposes. The Directors consider that the other operating capital significantly exceeds the actual day-to-day operational requirements.

Seed capital is the capital deployed to support the growth of new funds. Seed capital is limited to 25% of the Group’s total capital.

For regulatory capital purposes, Record plc is subject to consolidated financial supervision by the Financial Conduct Authority (“FCA”). 
Our regulatory capital requirements are in accordance with FCA rules and consistent with the Capital Requirements Directive. Our financial 
resources have exceeded our financial resource requirements (regulatory capital requirements) at all times during the year. Further information 
is provided in the Financial review on page 41.

28. Ultimate controlling party
As at 31 March 2021 the Company had no ultimate controlling party, nor at 31 March 2020.

29. Post-reporting date events
No adjusting or significant non-adjusting events have occurred between the reporting date and the date of authorisation.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Additional information  

135

Five year summary

Year ended 31 March 

Management fees 

Performance fees 

Other revenue 

Revenue 

Cost of sales  

Gross profit 

Operating expenses 

Other income/(expenditure) 

Operating profit 

Net interest 

Profit before taxation 

Taxation  

Profit after taxation 

Basic EPS (pence) 

Ordinary dividend (pence) 

Special dividend (pence)  

Restated 

Audited

2017 
£’000 

2018 
£’000 

2019 
£’000 

2020 
£’000 

2021 
£’000

22,718 

23,497 

22,308 

23,133 

24,878

— 

234 

— 

337 

2,333 

332 

1,819 

611 

81

453

22,952 

23,834 

24,973 

25,563 

25,412

(298) 

(311) 

(385) 

(255) 

(399)

22,654 

23,523 

24,588 

25,308 

25,013

(15,067) 

(16,424) 

(16,704) 

(17,741) 

(18,934)

157 

7,744 

112 

7,856 

(1,540) 

6,316 

2.91 

2.00 

0.91 

173 

7,272 

56 

7,328 

(1,182) 

6,146 

3.03 

2.30 

0.50 

(8) 

7,876 

113 

7,989 

(1,559) 

6,430 

3.27 

2.30 

0.69 

82 

7,649 

88 

7,737 

(1,365) 

6,372 

3.26 

2.30 

0.41 

41

6,120

33

6,153

(802)

5,351

2.75

2.30

0.45

Information for shareholders

Record plc
Record plc is a public limited company 
incorporated in the UK.  
Registered in England and Wales  
Company No. 1927640

Registered office
Morgan House  
Madeira Walk  
Windsor  
Berkshire  
SL4 1EP  
United Kingdom 

Tel: +44 (0)1753 852 222  
Fax: +44 (0)1753 852 224

Principal UK trading subsidiaries
Record Currency Management Limited
Registered in England and Wales  
Company No. 1710736

Record Group Services Limited
Registered in England and Wales  
Company No. 1927639

Both principal UK trading subsidiaries are 
based in Windsor.

Further information on Record plc  
can be found on the Group’s website: 
www.recordcm.com

Dates for 2021 dividend
Ex-dividend date  

Record date  

 1 July 2021

 2 July 2021

Annual General Meeting  

  27 July 2021

Final dividend  
payment date  

10 August 2021

Registrar
Link Group 
10th Floor 
Central Square 
29 Wellington Street 
Leeds 
LS1 4DL

Further information about the  
Registrar is available on their website  
www.linkgroup.eu

Strategic reportGovernanceFinancial statementsAdditional information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
136 

Record plc Annual Report 2021

Definitions

“AIFMD” 

“Articles” 

“AUME” 

“Board” 

“bps” 

“Companies Act” 

“Company” 

“$” or “dollars” 

“EBT” 

“EM” 

“EPS” 

“ESG” 

“ETF” 

“EU” 

“FRB” 

Alternative Investment Fund Managers Directive

The Articles of Association of the Company

Assets Under Management Equivalents

Company’s Board of Directors

Basis point = 100th of a per cent

Every statute (including any orders, regulations or other subordinate legislation made under it) from time  
to time in force concerning companies in so far as it applies to the Company

Record plc

All references to dollars or $ symbol are to the currency of the US unless stated otherwise

Employee Benefit Trust

Emerging Markets

Earnings per share

Environmental, social and governance

Exchange traded fund

European Union

Forward Rate Bias

“Group” or “Record” 

The Company and/or any one of its subsidiary undertakings

“IAS” 

International Accounting Standards

“IFRS” or “IFRSs” 

International Financial Reporting Standards

“IPO” 

“KPI” 

“KRI” 

“LGPS” 

Initial Public Offering

Key Performance Indicator

Key Risk Indicator

Local Government Pension Schemes

“London Stock Exchange” 

London Stock Exchange plc

“MiFID” 

“Official List” 

“TIPS” 

“US” 

Markets in Financial Instruments Directive

The official list of the Financial Conduct Authority

US government treasury inflation protected securities

United States of America

AUME definition
The basis for measuring AUME differs for each product and is detailed below:

•  Dynamic Hedging mandates – total amount of clients’ investment portfolios denominated in liquid foreign currencies, and hence capable 

(under the terms of the relevant mandate) of being hedged;

•  Passive Hedging mandates – the aggregate nominal amount of passive hedges actually outstanding in respect of each client;

•  Currency for Return mandates – the maximum aggregate nominal amount of outstanding forward contracts for each client;

•  Multi-product mandates – the chargeable mandate size for each client;

•  Cash – the total set aside by clients and managed and/or “equitised” using futures by Record.

 
This report is printed on Munken Lynx Smooth, an EU Ecolabel, EMAS, ISO-14001, FSC® (FSC-C022692) and PEFCTM 
(PEFC/05-33-99) certified paper. Arctic Paper Munkedals AB is one of the most environmentally-friendly paper mills in the world 
and meets the requirements for FSC® Chain-of-Custody (“CoC”) certification. FSC CoC certification assures that products sold 
with an FSC® claim originate from well-managed forests, controlled sources, and/or reclaimed materials in their supply chain.  
It confirms that throughout the production process there is: respect for human rights, adherence to all local applicable timber 
legislation and no involvement in the destruction of high conservation areas. Arctic Paper Munkedals’ Munkedal mill is 
committed to reducing its long-term environmental impact and has the lowest water consumption per kilogram of paper 
in the entire industry, whilst the company’s energy usage is within or below the EU’s Best Available Techniques.

This document was printed by Pureprint Group using its environmental print technology, with 100% of dry waste 
diverted from landfill, minimising the impact of printing on the environment. Pureprint Group is a CarbonNeutral® company 
and ISO 14001 registered.

Designed and produced by 

www.lyonsbennett.com

recordcm.com

Record plc
Morgan House 
Madeira Walk 
Windsor 
Berkshire SL4 1EP 
T: +44 (0)1753 852 222

marketing@recordcm.com 
www.recordcm.com

R

e

c

o

r

d

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

2

1